Part Number Hot Search : 
MFM65 1062246 MN512K TSOP6156 S2222A BSS51 141000 BSS51
Product Description
Full Text Search
 

To Download ID78K0-QB Datasheet File

  If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader .  
 
 


  Datasheet File OCR Text:
 User's Manual
ID78K0-QB Ver. 2.81
Integrated Debugger Operation Target Device 78K0 Series
Document No. U16996EJ2V0UM00 (2nd edition) Date Published March 2004 CP(K)
(c) NEC Electronics Corporation 2004
Printed in Japan
[MEMO]
2
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Windows are either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
3
* The information in this document is current as of March, 2004. The information is subject to change without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC Electronics products. Not all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales representative for availability and additional information. * No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. * NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others. * Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these circuits, software and information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information. * While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products, customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as redundancy, fire-containment and anti-failure features. * NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and "Specific". The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customerdesignated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application. "Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment and industrial robots. "Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed for life support). "Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc. The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application. (Note) (1) "NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-owned subsidiaries. (2) "NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics (as defined above).
M8E 02. 11-1
4
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Regional Information
Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC Electronics product in your application, pIease contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors. They will verify:
* * * * *
Device availability Ordering information Product release schedule Availability of related technical literature Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth) Network requirements
*
In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary from country to country. [GLOBAL SUPPORT] http://www.necel.com/en/support/support.html
NEC Electronics America, Inc. (U.S.)
Santa Clara, California Tel: 408-588-6000 800-366-9782
NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH
Duesseldorf, Germany Tel: 0211-65030
* Sucursal en Espana
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
Hong Kong Tel: 2886-9318
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
Seoul Branch Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-558-3737
Madrid, Spain Tel: 091-504 27 87
* Succursale Francaise
Velizy-Villacoublay, France Tel: 01-30-67 58 00
* Filiale Italiana
NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd.
Shanghai, P.R. China Tel: 021-5888-5400
Milano, Italy Tel: 02-66 75 41
* Branch The Netherlands
NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.
Taipei, Taiwan Tel: 02-2719-2377
Eindhoven, The Netherlands Tel: 040-244 58 45
* Tyskland Filial
NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Novena Square, Singapore Tel: 6253-8311
Taeby, Sweden Tel: 08-63 80 820
* United Kingdom Branch
Milton Keynes, UK Tel: 01908-691-133
J04.1
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
5
PREFACE
Target Readers
This manual is intended for user engineers who design and develop application systems of the 78K0 Series.
Purpose
This manual is intended for users to understand the functions of the ID78K0-QB in the organization below.
Organization
This manual consists of the following chapters: * OVERVIEW * INSTALLATION * STARTING AND TERMINATING * ASSOCIATION WITH PM plus * DEBUG FUNCTION * WINDOW REFERENCE * COMMAND REFERENCE
How to Use This Manual
It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical engineering, logic circuits, microcontrollers, C language, and assemblers. To understand the functions of the 78K0 Series Refer to Hardware User's Manual for each product. To understand the instruction functions of the 78K0 Series Refer to 78K/0 Series Instructions User's Manual (U12326E).
Conventions
Data significance: Note: Caution: Remark: Numerical representation:
Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right Footnote for item marked with Note in the text Information requiring particular attention Supplementary information Binary ... XXXX or XXXXB Decimal ... XXXX Hexadecimal ... 0xXXXX
Prefix indicating the power of 2 (address space, memory capacity): K (Kilo): G (Giga): 2
10 20 30
= 1024 = 10242 = 1024
3
M (Mega): 2
2
6
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Related Documents
Refer to the documents listed below when using this manual. The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions. However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.
Documents related to development tools (User's Manuals)
Document Name QB-78K0KX1H In-Circuit Emulator QB-78K0MINI On-Chip Debug Emulator RA78K0 Assembler Package Ver. 3.70 Operation Assembly Language Structured Assembly Language CC78K0 C Compiler Package Ver. 3.60 Operation Language ID78K0-QB Ver. 2.81 Integrated Debugger PM plus Ver.5.20 Operation Document No. U17081E U17029E U17015E U17014E U11789E U17017E U17016E This manual U16934E
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
7
[MEMO]
8
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW ... 17 1. 1 Features ... 18 1. 1. 1 New functions, enhanced functions ... 18 1. 1. 2 Other ... 19 1. 2 System Configuration ... 20 1. 3 Operating Environment ... 21 1. 3. 1 Hardware environment ... 21 1. 3. 2 Software environment ... 21 1. 4 Cautions During Debugging ... 22 1. 4. 1 When performing source level debugging ... 22 1. 4. 2 Security ID ... 22 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION ... 23 2. 1 Installing ... 23 2. 2 Uninstalling ... 23 CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING ... 24 3. 1 Startup Option and Argument Specification ... 25 3. 1. 1 Specification method ... 25 3. 1. 2 Specification format and options ... 26 3. 2 Starting ... 27 3. 3 Terminating ... 28 3. 4 Error Messages at Start up ... 29 3. 4. 1 When IECUBE Connected ... 29 3. 4. 2 When MINICUBE Connected ... 29 CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM PLUS ... 31 4. 1 Setting Build Mode ... 31 4. 2 Registering Debugger to PM plus Project ... 32 4. 2. 1 Selecting debugger ... 32 4. 3 To Start ID78K0-QB from PM plus ... 33 4. 3. 1 Restoring debugging environment ... 33 4. 4 Auto Load ... 34 4. 4. 1 Auto load by correcting source code ... 34 4. 4. 2 Auto load by starting debugger ... 34 CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION ... 35 5. 1 Setting Debugging Environment ... 36 5. 1. 1 Setting operating environment ... 36 5. 1. 2 Option settings ... 36 5. 1. 3 Mapping settings ... 36 5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function ... 37 5. 2. 1 Download ... 37 5. 2. 2 Upload ... 37 5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function ... 38 5. 3. 1 Source display ... 38 5. 3. 2 Disassemble display ... 38 5. 3. 3 Mixed display mode (Source window) ... 39 5. 3. 4 Convert symbol (Symbol to Address) ... 40 5. 4 Break Function ... 41 5. 4. 1 Break Types ... 41 5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting ... 42 5. 4. 3 Setting break to variable ... 43 5. 4. 4 Hardware break and software break ... 44 5. 4. 5 Fail-safe break ... 45 5. 5 Program Execution Function ... 46 5. 6 Watch Function ... 48 5. 6. 1 Displaying and changing data value ... 48 5. 6. 2 Displaying and changing local variable values ... 49
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
9
5. 6. 3 Registering and deleting watch data ... 49 5. 6. 4 Changing watch data ... 50 5. 6. 5 Temporarily displaying and changing data values ... 50 5. 6. 6 Toolbar watch function ... 50 5. 6. 7 Stack trace display function ... 51 5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function ... 52 5. 7. 1 Displaying and changing memory contents ... 52 5. 7. 2 Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents ... 53 5. 7. 3 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected) ... 53 5. 7. 4 Flash memory writing function (when MINICUBE connected) ... 53 5. 8 Register Manipulation Function ... 54 5. 8. 1 Displaying and changing register contents ... 54 5. 8. 2 Displaying and changing SFR contents ... 55 5. 8. 3 Displaying and changing I/O port contents ... 55 5. 9 Timer Function (When IECUBE Connected) ... 56 5. 9. 1 Timer event conditions ... 56 5. 9. 2 Run-Break event ... 57 5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected) ... 58 5. 10. 1 Trace memory ... 58 5. 10. 2 Checking trace data ... 59 5. 10. 3 Mixed display mode (Trace window) ... 60 5. 10. 4 Tracer Operation ... 60 5. 10. 5 Setting conditional trace ... 61 5. 11 Event Function ... 62 5. 11. 1 Using event function ... 62 5. 11. 2 Creating events ... 63 5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions ... 63 5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition ... 65 5. 11. 5 Managing events ... 66 5. 12 The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected) ... 67 5. 12. 1 Sampling range setting ... 67 5. 12. 2 Sampling time setting ... 67 5. 13 Load/Save Function ... 68 5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file) ... 68 5. 13. 2 Window display information (view file) ... 70 5. 13. 3 Window setting information (setting file) ... 71 5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows ... 72 5. 14. 1 Active status and static status ... 72 5. 14. 2 Jump function ... 73 5. 14. 3 Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected) ... 75 5. 14. 4 Drag & drop function ... 76 5. 14. 5 Cautions ... 78 CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE ... 79 6. 1 Window List ... 79 6. 2 Explanation of Windows ... 81 Main window ... 82 Configuration dialog box ... 94 Extended Option dialog box ... 102 Fail-safe Break dialog box ... 105 Mask Option dialog box ... 107 Debugger Option dialog box ... 109 Project File Save dialog box ... 116 Project File Load dialog box ... 118 Download dialog box ... 120 Upload dialog box ... 123 Source window ... 125 Source Search dialog box ... 130 Source Text move dialog box ... 132 Assemble window ... 134 Assemble Search dialog box ... 138 Address move dialog box ... 140 Symbol To Address dialog box ... 141
10
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Watch window ... 143 Quick Watch dialog box ... 148 Add Watch dialog box ... 151 Change Watch dialog box ... 154 Local Variable window ... 156 Stack Trace window ... 159 Memory window ... 163 Memory Search dialog box ... 167 Memory Fill dialog box ... 170 Memory Copy dialog box ... 172 Memory Compare dialog box ... 174 Memory Compare Result dialog box ... 176 Register window ... 178 SFR window ... 181 SFR Select dialog box ... 185 Add I/O Port dialog box ... 188 Timer dialog box ... 191 Timer Result dialog box ... 195 Trace window ... 196 Trace Search dialog box ... 201 Trace Data Select dialog box ... 206 Trace move dialog box ... 209 Trace dialog box ... 211 Delay Count dialog box ... 214 Event Manager ... 216 Software Break Manager ... 221 Event dialog box ... 224 Break dialog box ... 230 View File Save dialog box ... 232 View File Load dialog box ... 235 Environment Setting File Save dialog box ... 237 Environment Setting File Load dialog box ... 239 Reset Debugger dialog box ... 241 Exit Debugger dialog box ... 242 About dialog box ... 243 Console window ... 245 Font dialog box ... 246 Browse dialog box ... 248 CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE ... 250 7. 1 Command Line Rules ... 250 7. 2 Command List ... 251 7. 3 List of Variables ... 253 7. 4 List of Packages ... 253 7. 5 Key Bind ... 253 7. 6 Expansion window ... 253 7. 7 Callback Procedure ... 254 7. 8 Hook Procedure ... 255 7. 9 Related Files ... 256 7. 10 Cautions ... 256 7. 11 Explanation of Commands ... 256 address ... 257 assemble ... 258 batch ... 259 breakpoint ... 260 dbgexit ... 262 download ... 263 extwin ... 264 finish ... 265 go ... 266 help ... 267 hook ... 268 ie ... 269
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
11
inspect ... 270 jump ... 271 map ... 272 mdi ... 273 memory ... 274 module ... 275 next ... 276 refresh ... 277 register ... 278 reset ... 279 run ... 280 step ... 281 stop ... 282 upload ... 283 version ... 284 watch ... 285 where ... 286 wish ... 287 xtime ... 288 xtrace ... 289 7. 12 Samples (Calculator Script) ... 290 APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW ... 291 A. 1 Overview ... 291 A. 2 Sample List of Expansion Window ... 291 A. 3 Activation ... 291 A. 4 Explanation of each sample window ... 291 List window ... 292 Grep window ... 293 Hook window ... 294 APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS ... 296 B. 1 Usable Character Set ... 296 B. 2 Symbols ... 297 B. 3 Numeric Values ... 298 B. 4 Expressions and Operators ... 298 B. 5 File Names ... 301 APPENDIX C KEY FUNCTION LIST ... 302 APPENDIX D MESSAGES ... 305 D. 1 Display Format ... 305 D. 2 Types of Messages ... 305 D. 3 Message Lists ... 306 APPENDIX E INDEX ... 329
12
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure No 1-1 1-2 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 4-1 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 6-24 6-25 6-26 6-27 6-28
Title, Page
Example of ID78K0-QB System Configuration (IECUBE) ... 20 Example of ID78K0-QB System Configuration (MINICUBE) ... 20 Startup Option ... 25 Configuration Dialog Box ... 27 Main Window (Startup) ... 28 Exit Debugger Dialog Box ... 28 [Debugger Settings] Dialog Box (PM plus) ... 32 Breakpoint Setting ... 42 Setting Break to Variable ... 43 Management of Software Breaks ... 44 Fail-safe Break Setting ... 45 Execution Button ... 46 [Run] Menu ... 46 Watch Window ... 48 Specification of the Display Format (Debugger Option dialog box) ... 48 Local Variable Window ... 49 Change Watch Dialog Box ... 50 Quick Watch dialog box ... 50 Stack Trace Window ... 51 Displaying and Changing Memory Contents ... 52 Access Monitor function (Memory Window) ... 53 Absolute Name/Function Name Switching ... 54 Displaying SFR Contents ... 55 Register I/O Port ... 55 Sets and DisplaysTimer Event (Timer Dialog Box) ... 56 Checking Trace Data ... 59 Setting of Various Event Conditions ... 63 Managing Events (Event Manager) ... 66 Sampling Time Setting ... 67 Automatic Save/Automatic Load Setting for Project File ... 68 Main Window ... 82 Toolbar (Picture Only) ... 91 Toolbar (Picture and Text) ... 91 Status Bar ... 91 Configuration Dialog Box (When IECUBE connected) ... 94 Configuration Dialog Box (When MINICUBE connected) ... 95 Diagram of Address Space When Internal ROM Bank Is Used ... 97 Extended Option Dialog Box ... 102 Fail-safe Break dialog box ... 105 Mask Option dialog box ... 107 Debugger Option Dialog Box ... 109 Add Source Path Dialog Box ... 110 Project File Save Dialog Box ... 116 Project File Load Dialog Box ... 118 Download Dialog Box ... 120 The Progress of Download ... 120 Upload Dialog Box ... 123 Source window ... 125 Source Search Dialog Box ... 130 Source Text Move Dialog Box ... 132 Assemble window ... 134 Assemble Search Dialog Box ... 138 Address Move Dialog Box (Example: When Memory Window Is Open) ... 140 Symbol To Address Dialog Box ... 141 Watch Window ... 143 Quick Watch Dialog Box ... 148 Add Watch Dialog Box ... 151 Change Watch Dialog Box ... 154
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
13
6-29 6-30 6-31 6-32 6-33 6-34 6-35 6-36 6-37 6-38 6-39 6-40 6-41 6-42 6-43 6-44 6-45 6-46 6-47 6-48 6-49 6-50 6-51 6-52 6-53 6-54 6-55 6-56 6-57 6-58 6-59 6-60 6-61 6-62 6-63 7-1 A-1 A-2 A-3 D-1
Local Variable Window ... 156 Stack Trace Window ... 159 Memory Window ... 163 Memory Search Dialog Box ... 167 Memory Fill Dialog Box ... 170 Memory Copy Dialog Box ... 172 Memory Compare Dialog Box ... 174 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box ... 176 Register Window ... 178 SFR Window ... 181 SFR Select Dialog Box ... 185 Add I/O Port Dialog Box ... 188 Timer Dialog Box ... 191 Timer Result Dialog Box ... 195 Trace Window ... 196 Trace Search Dialog Box ... 201 Trace Data Select Dialog Box ... 206 Trace Move Dialog Box ... 209 Trace Dialog Box ... 211 Delay Count Dialog Box ... 214 Event Manager (In detailed display mode) ... 216 Select Display Information Dialog Box ... 220 Software Break Manager ... 221 Event Dialog Box ... 224 Break Dialog Box ... 230 View File Save Dialog Box ... 232 View File Load Dialog Box ... 235 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box ... 237 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box ... 239 Reset Debugger Dialog Box ... 241 Exit Debugger Dialog Box ... 242 About Dialog Box ... 243 Console Window ... 245 Font Dialog Box ... 246 Browse Dialog Box ... 248 Execution Screen ... 290 List window ... 292 Grep window ... 293 Hook window ... 294 Error/Warning Messages ... 305
14
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
LIST OF TABLES
Table No 2-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16 5-17 5-18 5-19 5-20 5-21 5-22 5-23 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 6-11 6-12 6-13 6-14 6-15 6-16 6-17 6-18 6-19 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-23 7-1 7-2 7-3 A-1 B-1 B-2 B-3 B-4
Title, Page Install ... 23 Startup Options ... 26 Execution File ... 26 Error Message Output Pattern (When IECUBE Connected) ... 29 Debug Function List (Flow of Debugging Operations) ... 35 Details of Mapping Attributes ... 36 Type of File That Can Be Downloaded ... 37 Type of File That Can Be Uploaded ... 37 File Type Can Be Displayed ... 38 Specifying Symbols ... 40 Break Types ... 41 The Number of Valid Software Break ... 44 Type of Execution ... 46 Absolute Name to Function Name Correspondence ... 54 Trace memory size ... 58 Type of Trace Modes ... 60 Types of Tracer Control Mode ... 61 Types of Conditional Trace ... 61 Various Event Conditions ... 62 Number of enabled events for each event condition ... 65 Event icon ... 66 Contents Saved to Project File ... 69 Type of the View Files ... 70 Type of the Setting Files ... 71 Details of Jump Source Address ... 73 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Line/Address) ... 76 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Character String) ... 77 Window List ... 79 CPU status ... 92 IE status ... 92 Break Cause ... 92 Range and Unit of Internal ROM/RAM Setting ... 96 Type of Mapping Attribute ... 100 Mapping Unit ... 101 Event Setting Status (Event Mark) ... 126 Watch Window Display Format (Symbol) ... 144 Watch Window Display Format (Data) ... 145 Watch Window Input Format ... 152 How a Variable Is Handled When a Scope Is Specified ... 152 Measurable Values ... 193 Cause of Stopping Tracer ... 197 Settable Range of Address Condition (Trace) ... 203 Frame Number Specification Format ... 210 Number of Events Settable ... 212 Separator for Displaying Event Details ... 217 Status condition ... 225 Settable Range of Address Condition (Event) ... 227 Settable Range of Data Condition ... 228 Pass Count ... 229 Number of Events Settable in Break Condition Setting Area ... 231 ID78K0-QBList of Debugger Control Commands ... 251 List of Console/Tcl Commands ... 252 Message ID ... 254 List of Expansion Window (Sample) ... 291 List of Character Set ... 296 List of Special Characters ... 296 Input Format of Numeric Values ... 298 List of Operators ... 299
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
15
B-5 B-6 C-1 D-1
Operator Priority ... 300 Range of Radixes ... 300 Key Function List ... 302 Types of Messages ... 305
16
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
The Integrated Debugger ID78K0-QB for the 78K0 Series (hereafter referred to as the ID78K0-QB) is a software tool developed for NEC Electronics 78K0 Series of microcontrollers for embedded control. This software tool is intended to enable efficient debugging of user programs. This chapter explains the following items regarding the ID78K0-QB. - Features - System Configuration - Operating Environment - Cautions During Debugging
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
17
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1. 1
Features
The ID78K0-QB has the following features: - New functions, enhanced functions - Other Caution When IECUBE is connected, self-programming cannot be emulated. Note also that when MINICUBE is connected, the following functions are not available, and the number of events in the event function is restricted. - Timer function - Trace function - Real-time monitor function (RRM function) 1. 1. 1 New functions, enhanced functions
(1) Enhanced RRM function (when IECUBE connected) In the Memory window, the access status (read, write, read & write) can be displayed in different colors using this function. This can also be used as a simple coverage function. (2) Enhanced timer function (when IECUBE connected) Using an external clock of 50 MHz, measurement of up to 2 segments + Run-Break time (time from program execution start until break) is possible (refer to "5. 9 Timer Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). Other than during Run-Break, the maximum time, minimum time, pass count, and average time are displayed. Measured time display during user program execution and time-over break are supported. (3) Fail-safe break support In addition to the traditional guarded areas and SFR areas, fail-safe break is also supported for the guarded areas of internal ROM/internal RAM (refer to "5. 4. 5 Fail-safe break"). (4) Enhanced command function
Script file specification is possible at ID startup (refer to "3. 1 Startup Option and Argument Specification"). Testing can be done with 1 click by specifying a project file at the same time as the script file. The Tcl/Tk core was updated to the latest version 8.4. (5) Settings during program execution (when IECUBE connected) Timer event conditions and trace event conditions can now be set during user program execution. (6) Support of both IECUBE and MINICUBE Two emulators (IECUBE, MINICUBE) can be connected with 1 debugger (ID78K0-QB) (refer to "1. 2 System Configuration"). USB2.0 is supported for the first time by NEC Electronics.
18
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
(7) Hardware detailed version display The hardware detailed version is displayed in the About dialog box. The version can also be confirmed in the Configuration dialog box prior to startup, and the display information can be copied and pasted. Pasting to support mail is now easy. 1. 1. 2 Other
(1) Using function of in-circuit emulator By using the event setting function of an in-circuit emulator, break events can be set, the user program can be traced, and time can be measured, and so on (refer to "5. 11 Event Function"). (2) Support of on-chip debugging (when MINICUBE connected) A debugging function implemented by the on-chip debug unit is provided. (3) Flash memory writing function (when MINICUBE connected) The internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded by the same access method as an ordinary memory operation (refer to "5. 7. 4 Flash memory writing function (when MINICUBE connected)"). (4) Security function (when MINICUBE connected) The ID code stored in the internal flash memory of a product with a security unit can be authenticated (refer to "(5) ID Code" in the " Configuration dialog box"). (5) Function expansion through Tcl The batch processing and hook processing, and the creation of original user custom windows are possible using the command line with Tcl/Tk (Tool Command Language) (refer to "CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE", "APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW").
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
19
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1. 2
System Configuration
The ID78K0-QB can be connected to the following two types of emulators. As a result, user programs developed for the 78K0 Series and a pleasant debugging environment for target systems are provided. (1) IECUBE (in-circuit emulator) The IECUBE can be manipulated from the ID78K0-QB by connected it to the ID78K0-QB via a USB cable. Figure 1-1 Host machine IECUBE USB1.1/2.0 Example of ID78K0-QB System Configuration (IECUBE)
(2) MINICUBE (on-chip debug emulator) The MINICUBE can be manipulated from the ID78K0-QB by connecting it to the host machine via a USB cable. The MINICUBE can provide debugging functions by being connected to a microcontroller with an on-chip OCD function. Figure 1-2 Example of ID78K0-QB System Configuration (MINICUBE) Host machine MINICUBE Target system
20
Target System
USB1.1/2.0
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1. 3
Operating Environment
This section explains the following items regarding the operating environment. - Hardware environment - Software environment 1. 3. 1 Hardware environment
(1) Host machine The machine by which the target OS operates (2) In-circuit emulator (any of the following) - IECUBE for 78K0 - MINICUBE 1. 3. 2 Software environment
(1) OS (any of the following) Windows98, Windows2000, WindowsMe, WindowsXP Home Edition, WindowsXP Professional Caution Regardless of which of the OS above is used, we recommend that the latest Service Pack is installed.
(2) Device file (Individual acquisition) - The device file of the target device to be used. This file is available from the following Web site of NEC Electronics. http://www.necel.com/micro
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
21
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW
1. 4
Cautions During Debugging
The cautions to be observed during debugging are described below. - When performing source level debugging - Security ID 1. 4. 1 When performing source level debugging
The object file for which source level debugging is performed must include symbol information or other information for debugging (debugging information). Therefore, perform the following processing during source file compiling. (1) When using PM plus Specify [Debug Build] when the Build mode is selected. (2) When using LK78K0 on standalone basis Add the -g option. 1. 4. 2 Security ID
The object file used when MINICUBE is connected must include the security ID information. For the security ID78K0-QB settings, refer to "RA78K0 Assembler Package Manipulation". For details about the security ID, refer to the MINICUBE user's manual. The security ID (ID code) from the ID78K0-QB is specified in the Configuration dialog box.
22
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
This chapter explains the following items about installation of ID78K0-QB. - Installing - Uninstalling
2. 1
Installing
The following items must be installed, when the ID78K0-QB is used. Table 2-1 Install Item ID78K0-QBsystem disk Used device file
Install the contents of this disk according to the automatically executed installer. Install this file according to the DFINST.exe dedicated startup installer by selecting [Start] menu -> [Program] -> [NEC Tools32] -> [Device File Installer].
Caution
To install the ID78K0-QB again after the ID78K0-QB has been installed once, be sure to uninstall the ID78K0-QB. If the ID78K0-QB is installed in a directory different from that, without uninstalling, the ID78K0-QB that has already been installed cannot be uninstalled.
2. 2
Uninstalling
Perform uninstall using [Add/Remove Programs] in the Control Panel.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Procedure
23
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
This chapter explains the procedure of starting and terminating the ID78K0-QB. - Startup Option and Argument Specification - Starting - Terminating - Error Messages at Start up
24
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
3. 1
Startup Option and Argument Specification
The procedure for specifying the startup options and arguments for the ID78K0-QB is described below. By specifying the startup options and arguments, it is possible to specify the script file at startup and the project file. Remark When starting up the ID78K0-QB from PM plus, the startup option and argument settings are performed in [Debugger Settings...] in the [Tool] menu of PM plus (refer to "CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM PLUS"). The debugger startup option can be set to the option column.
3. 1. 1 1)
Specification method Create an ID78K0-QB shortcut on the desktop. The ID78K0-QB execution file (*.exe) is located in the bin folder in the folder to which the installation was
2)
Open the properties of the created shortcut and after the execution file name displayed in [Target:], specify the option and argument (refer to "3. 1. 2 Specification format and options"). Figure 3-1 Startup Option
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
performed (refer to "Table 3-2
Execution File").
25
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
3. 1. 2
Specification format and options
(1) Specification format xxx.exe ?options? xxx.exe ?options? project Each option and argument is separated by a space. No distinction is made between uppercase and lowercase in the character string. Arguments enclosed between '?' can be omitted. When a project file is specified, that project file is read at startup. However, during PM plus startup, the project file specification is ignored. (2) Specification options The following options can be specified. Table 3-1 Options /SC /SCRIPT:script file name Startup Options Meaning Change background color of window to system color. Specify the script file to be executed at startup.
(3) Specification example Example 1) Specification of script file only xxx.exe /script:c:/work/script.tcl Example 2) Specification of script file and project file xxx.exe /script:c:/work/script.tcl c:/work/project.prj
Caution
Make the script file (*.tcl file) name excluding the extension different from the load module file name and project file name. In the case of this example, do not place a file named project.tcl in c:/work.
(4)
Execution file
Execution files and names displayed from the [Start] menu are as follows. Table 3-2 Execution File Connected IE IECUBE MINICUBE idk032g.exe idk032o.exe Execution file
26
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Name ([Start] Menu) ID78K0-QB for IECUBE ID78K0-QB for MINICUBE
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
3. 2 1)
Starting ID78K0-QB startup is executed from the [Start] menu or by clicking the shortcut created on the desktop. Start the ID850QB, the Configuration dialog box will be opened.
Caution
In this case, the Configuration dialog box should not be displayed, but an error message should be displayed, please cope with it with reference to "3. 4 Error Messages at Start up" . Figure 3-2 Configuration Dialog Box
2)
Set the items related to the operating environment of the ID78K0-QB in the Configuration dialog box. After setting each item, click the button in the dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
27
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
3)
The Main window will be opened and the ID78K0-QB can be operated. Mainly use this window for debugging. Figure 3-3 Main Window (Startup)
3. 3 1)
Terminating Select [File] menu-> [Exit] on the Main window. The following the Exit Debugger dialog box will be opened: (An execution stop confirmation message is displayed when stop operation is performed during program execution.) Figure 3-4 Exit Debugger Dialog Box
2)
To save the current debugging environment to a project file, click the button. If the button is clicked, all the windows are closed the ID78K0-QB terminated.
28
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
3. 4
Error Messages at Start up
Error messages that may be output when ID78K0-QB starts up are listed below (by order of occurrence). When these messages are output, refer to "APPENDIX D MESSAGES". 3. 4. 1 When IECUBE Connected
The pattern of the output error message differs as follows depending on the connection status with the target and the settings in the Configuration dialog box. Table 3-3 Error Message Error Message Output Pattern (When IECUBE Connected) [Target] area in the Configuration dialog box Conne ct Ff606: Please check connection with the target board, and power on it. Wf607 : Please check connection of the exchange adapter. Ff608 : Please disconnect the target board. Ff609: Please power off the target board, and disconnect it. Check ed Check ed Check ed Check ed Check ed Check ed Check ed Check ed Not Connect Target Exchange Adapter Not Conne cted Used Not Used Target Power Supply ON OFF
3. 4. 2
When MINICUBE Connected
F0100 : Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board. F0c43: Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable. F03a0: Target is not turned on. Ff605: Please check connection with the target board. Ff606: Please check connection with the target board, and power on it. A0105: Failed in reading device file (d0xxx.78k). F0ca2: Device file which does not correspond to on tip debug. F0ca3: Information that it does not support is included in on tip debug information on device file. F0ca4 : Device file which does not correspond to IECUBE. F0c71: Reset cannot be performed. A0c01: During access of register, CPU did time out. A0c02: During access of memory, CPU did time out. A0c03: During access of SFR, CPU did time out.
Conne cted
Check ed Check ed Check ed
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
29
CHAPTER 3 STARTING AND TERMINATING
A01a0: No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(IECUBE) No response from the CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(N-Wire CARD) No response from the emulation CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET,WAIT and so on.(78K0)
30
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM PLUS
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM PLUS
The ID78K0-QB can automatically perform a series of operations in development processes, such as creating source files -> compiling -> debugging -> correcting source files, in association with the PM plus. This chapter explains the following items about association with the PM plus. - Setting Build Mode - Registering Debugger to PM plus Project - To Start ID78K0-QB from PM plus - Auto Load Caution If a load module file is created by using the Windows command prompt, the function to associate the ID78K0-QB with the PM plus cannot be used.
4. 1
Setting Build Mode
To debug the load module file created by the PM plus on the ID78K0-QB at the source level, build to output symbol information for debugging must be performed to create a load module file. This setting can be performed by selecting [Debug Build] on the PM plus.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
31
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM PLUS
4. 2
Registering Debugger to PM plus Project
The debugger to be used or the load module files to be downloaded can be specified for each project in the PM plus. 4. 2. 1 Selecting debugger
The procedure for selecting the debugger is as follows: (1) Creating a new workspace 1) Select [File] menu -> [New Workspace...] on the PM plus. -> This opens the dialog box to create a new workspace using the wizard format. 2) Creating the necessary settings for the workspace with the wizard, the [New Workspace - Step 7/8 (Select Debugger)] dialog box will be opened. Specify ID78K0-QB in this dialog box. (Refer to "Table 3-2 Execution File".) For details of the setting, refer to the "PM plus online help" or "User's manual". (2) Using an existing workspace 1) Select [Tool] menu -> [Debugger Settings...] on the PM plus. -> The [Debugger Settings] dialog box will be opened. Figure 4-1 [Debugger Settings] Dialog Box (PM plus)
32
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
2)
Specify ID78K0-QB and click the button in this dialog box. (Refer to "Table 3-2
Execution File".)
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM PLUS
The ID78K0-QB is registered as the debugger of the active project. toolbar of the PM plus. Caution
The ID78K0-QB icon is displayed on the
If [Execute symbol reset after dowmload] in the [Debugger Settings] dialog box of the product with a internal flash memory is checked, the contents of the internal flash memory are erased before downloading (when MINICUBE connected)
4. 3
To Start ID78K0-QB from PM plus
The ID78K0-QB can be started from the PM plus as follows: - Click the ID78K0-QB starting button on the toolbar of the PM plus. - Select the [Build] menu -> [Debug] on the PM plus. - Select the [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug] on the PM plus. - Select the [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus. If the debugging environment of the ID78K0-QB is saved to a project file currently being used by the PM plus, it will be started in the debugging environment saved in the project file. If the debugging environment of the ID78K0-QB is not saved to a project file being used by the PM plus, the Configuration dialog box is opened. At this time, the device type (chip name) cannot be changed. 4. 3. 1 Restoring debugging environment
The previous debugging environment can be restored by the following procedure when the ID78K0-QB is started from the PM plus: 1) 2) Create a new workspace (project file: e.g., sample.prj) on the PM plusNote. Start the ID78K0-QB from the PM plus. Because a new project file is created, set items other than the device type (chip name) in the Configuration dialog box in the same manner as when only the ID78K0-QB is started. 3) 4) 5) Download the load module file to be debugged with the Download dialog box of the ID78K0-QB. Debug the load module file on the ID78K0-QB. Click the button on the Exit Debugger dialog box when the ID78K0-QB is terminated. -> The debugging environment will be saved to the project file (sample.prj) for the PM plus when the ID78K0-QB is terminated (the debug environment can also be saved to the sample.prj file by overwriting the project file at times other than the completion of ID78K0-QB debugging). 6) When the ID78K0-QB is next started up after the sample.prj file is read by PM plus, the debug environment at the point when the project file was saved is automatically restored. Note In the ID78K0-QB and PM plus, the environment information is saved to a project file and referenced. The extension of the project file that can be used by the ID78K0-QB and PM plus is "prj". For the information that is saved or restored by the project file, refer to the "Online help" or the "Uer's manual" of each product.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
33
CHAPTER 4 ASSOCIATION WITH PM PLUS
4. 4
Auto Load
If a bug is found while the load module file is being debugged by the ID78K0-QB, correct the source file using the following procedure. Compiling and re-downloading the file can be automatically executed. (Refer to "4. 4. 1 Auto load by correcting source code".) The load module is downloaded again to the ID78K0-QB by compiling and linking the file on the PM plus with the activated ID78K0-QB. (Refer to "4. 4. 2 Auto load by starting debugger".) Caution This processing cannot be performed if it is selected that the standard editor (idea-L) is used with the PM plus.
4. 4. 1
Auto load by correcting source code
Correct the source file for auto load as follows: 1) Open the source file to be corrected in the Source window. Select [File] menu -> [Open] and specify the file to be corrected on the ID78K0-QB (if the file is already open in the Source window, that window is displayed in the forefront). -> The specified file will be opened in the Source window. 2) Select [Edit] menu -> [Correct Source] on the ID78K0-QB. -> An editor will be opened and the specified source file will be read. 3) 4) Correct the source file on the editor. Terminate the editor. The CPU reset is not performed when the load module file is automatically downloaded. The debug window that was opened when the editor was called, and each event setting will be restored. If the previously used line or symbol has been deleted as a result of correcting the source file, the following happens: - A variable that was displayed is dimmed. - The event mark of an event condition is displayed in yellow. - A software break point may be deleted. 5) 4. 4. 2 Select [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug], or [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus. Auto load by starting debugger
Caution
If the following operation is performed on the PM plus with the ID78K0-QB started, the load module will be automatically downloaded to the ID78K0-QB. - Selecting the [Build] menu -> [Build and Debug] on the PM plus. - Selecting the [Build] menu -> [Rebuild and Debug] on the PM plus. Caution The CPU reset is performed after the load module has been downloaded.
34
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
This chapter explains about debug function of ID78K0-QB. Table 5-1 Debug Function List (Flow of Debugging Operations) Item To set the debugging environment To download the load module To display the source file and the disassemble result To set a break point To execute the user program To check the variable value To check and edit the memory contents To check and change the register variable To check the execution time To check the trace data To manage the events RRM function To save the debug environment and window status Jump function, linking window and cautions
Refer To 5. 1 Setting Debugging Environment 5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function 5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function 5. 4 Break Function 5. 5 Program Execution Function 5. 6 Watch Function 5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function 5. 8 Register Manipulation Function 5. 9 Timer Function (When IECUBE Connected) 5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected) 5. 11 Event Function 5. 12 The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected) 5. 13 Load/Save Function 5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
35
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 1
Setting Debugging Environment
This section explains the following items related to the setting debugging environment: - Setting operating environment - Option settings - Mapping settings 5. 1. 1 Setting operating environment
The in-circuit emulator operating environment settings are performed in the Configuration dialog box that is automatically displayed when ID78K0-QB starts up. If a project file already exists, the debugging environment can be restored by clicking the button. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)".) 5. 1. 2 Option settings
The expanded options and debug options are set in the Extended Option dialog box, the Debugger Option dialog box and the Mask Option dialog box . 5. 1. 3 Mapping settings
The mapping settings are performed in the Configuration dialog box. The following types of mapping attributes are available:
Table 5-2 Details of Mapping Attributes Attribute Target
User area mapping The memory area specified for user area mapping becomes the area to accesses the memory in the target system or memory incorporated in the CPU. A memory area specified as the internal ROM is equivalent to the internal ROM of the target device (core). If the target device attempts writing to this memory area, a write protect break occurs. A memory area specified as the internal high-speed RAM is equivalent to the internal high-speed RAM of the target device (core). The actual memory configuration depends on the target system. A memory area specified as the internal extend RAM is equivalent to the internal extend RAM of the target device (core). The actual memory configuration depends on the target system. An I/O Protect area can be set in the area specified for the "target". The I/O protect area is displayed in the same manner as an area that is not mapped (display symbol: ??), on the Memory window. By mapping an area with this attribute, data cannot be read or written from/to this area by the Memory window, on the area can therefore be protected from an illegal access. To read or write the value of the area mapped with this attribute, register the value in the SFR window or the Watch window. Only the Internal high-speed RAM area can be set as the stack area (the Internal Extend RAM area cannot be set as the Stack area) (when IECUBE connected). Note that if the Stack area is not specified, the entire Internal high-speed RAM area (excluding the register area) is specified as the Stack area by default.
Internal ROM
Internal high-speed RAM
Internal Extend RAM
I/O Protect area
Stack area
36
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Meaning
5. 2
Download Function / Upload Function
ID78K0-QB allows downloading and uploading of object files of the formats listed in the following table: Table 5-
- Download - Upload Remark When the MINICUBE is connected, the internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded (refer to "5. 7. 4 Flash memory writing function (when MINICUBE connected)"). 5. 2. 1 Download
Object file download is done in the Download dialog box. The corresponding source text file (Source window) is displayed by downloading load module files with debug information.
Format Load module (XCOFF(.LNK, .LMF)) Intel Hex format (00, 01, 02, 03 - 20bit address) Motorola Hex format S type (S0, S2, S8) Extended Tektronix Hex format Binary data
Note 5. 2. 2
Automatic format detection Upload
Uploading of memory contents, etc., is performed in the Upload dialog box. The saving range can be set.
Format Intel Hex format (standard - 16bit-address) Motorola Hex format S type(S0, S2, S8 - 24bit-address) Extended Tektronix Hex format Binary data
Note
Specify saving format.
Table 5-4
3
, Table 5-4
.
Table 5-3

5
DEBUG FUNCTION
Type of File That Can Be Downloaded Extension Load Module (*.lnk, *.lmf) Hex Format (*.hex)Note
Binary Data (*.bin)
Type of File That Can Be Uploaded Extension Hex Format (*.hex)Note
Binary Data (*.bin)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
37
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 3
Source Display, Disassemble Display Function Disassemble display and online assemble are per-
Source file display is performed in the Source window. formed in the Assemble window. - Source display - Disassemble display - Mixed display mode (Source window) - Convert symbol (Symbol to Address) 5. 3. 1 Source display
The corresponding text file is displayed in the Source window by downloading a load module file having debug information. The display start position can be changed in the Source Text move dialog box displayed by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. Specifications related to the tab size, display font, etc., and specification of the source path are done in the Debugger Option dialog box. Specify a searching method in the Source Search dialog box opened by clicking the button. The search result is highlighted in the Source window. Table 5-5 File Type (Extension) Source (*.c, *.s, *.asm) Text (*.txt) All (*.*) File Type Can Be Displayed
Source file (The extension can be changed in the Debugger Option dialog box.) Text file All files
5. 3. 2
Disassemble display
Disassemble display is done in the Assemble window. The display start position can be changed in the Address move dialog box opened by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. Offset display and register name display specification are performed in the Debugger Option dialog box. Specify a searching method in the Assemble Search dialog box opened by clicking the button. The search result is highlighted in the Assemble window.
38
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Meaning
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 3. 3
Mixed display mode (Source window)
Disassemble display of programs combined with the source file can be done by selecting [View] menu -> [Mix] in the Source window. The display contents in the mixed display mode can be saved as a view file. Normal display mode
In the normal display mode, general text files can be displayed as well as source files. Mixed display mode
If a program code corresponds to the line of the displayed source file, the disassembly line is displayed next to the source line. The label of the address, code data, and disassembled mnemonic are displayed (the display start position of the mnemonic is adjusted by the set value of the tab size). Caution The mixed display mode is valid only when the load module is downloaded and the symbol information is read, and the corresponding source file is displayed.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
39
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 3. 4
Convert symbol (Symbol to Address)
In the Symbol To Address dialog box, can be displayed the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. Convert symbol is performed by selecting the character string to be converted in the Source window or Assemble window, and then selecting context menu -> [Symbol...]. The Specification symbols is indicated below. Table 5-6 Conversion Target Variable Specifying Symbols Specification Method var file#var (to specify a static variable with file name) func#var (to specify a static variable with function name) file#func#var (to specify a static variable with file name and function name) func file#func (to specify a static function with file name) label file#label (to specify a local label with file name) equsym file#equsym (to specify a local EQU symbol with file name) bitsym file#bitsym (to specify a local bit symbol with file name) file#no prog$file#no portname sfrname regname pswname
Function Label EQUsymbol Bit symbol Line number of source file I/O port name SFR name Register name PSW flag name
Remark 1 Separator '#' '#' is used as a separator for file names, variables, function names, and line numbers. If a specified symbol is not found in the scope, all symbols (static variables, static functions, local labels) are searched. Remark 2 Separator '$' To specify a load module name when two or more load modules are read, use "$" as a separator to delimit the load module name from a file name, variable, function name, or symbol name. default status, a symbol name takes precedence. a symbol gives the priority to a register name. In the
40
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
To temporarily change the priority, prefixing "$" to
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 4
Break Function
The break function is used to stop execution of the user program by the CPU and operation of the tracer. - Break Types - Breakpoint setting - Setting break to variable - Hardware break and software break - Fail-safe break 5. 4. 1 Break Types
The has the following break functions.
Table 5-7 Break Types Item Hardware break Note1 (Event detection break) Software break Note1
Function to stop user program execution upon detection of the set break even condition. -> Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting". Function to replace the instruction at the specified address software break instruction and stop the user program executed (refer to "5. 4. 4 Hardware break and software break"). -> Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting". Function to stop user program execution selected by selecting [Run] menu -> [Come Here] upon detection of address specified in the Source window the Assemble window. Function to stop execution upon satisfaction of stop condition of each command ([Step In], [Next Over], [Return Out], [Slow Motion]). Function to forcibly stop execution by selecting [Run] menu > [Stop], and selecting the STOP button. It is valid for all the execution commands. Function to forcibly stop execution when the user program performs an illegal operation in relation to the memory or registers (refer to "5. 4. 5 Fail-safe break"). -> Refer to " Fail-safe Break dialog box". Function to stop user program execution when the measurement time exceeds the specified timeout time (refer to " Timer dialog box").
[Come Here] break Note2 (Simple break)
Break on satisfaction of condition of step execution Forced break
Fail-safe break
Time out break
Note1 Note2
This break is valid for [Go], [Go & GO], [Come Here], and [Restart]. After user program execution has been stopped, the breakpoint by this function is eliminated. During execution of a user program by this function, break events set before the cursor position does not occur.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Contents
41
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 4. 2
Breakpoint setting
Breakpoints can simply be set to the desired location by clicking in the Source window or the Assemble window. Since breakpoints are set as break event conditions and managed using the Event Function, restrictions apply to the number of breakpoints that can be set. tion".) (1) Breakpoint setting method Breakpoints are executed by clicking lines in which '*' is displayed (lines where program code exists). In the default setting, software breakpoint (B) is set, but if [Breakpoint] is selected in the context menu, hardware breakpoint (B, or B) is set. If a breakpoint is set on a line on which an event breakpoint has already been set, "A" indicating that multiple (Refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condi-
Caution Remark
A software breakpoint cannot be set in an externally mapped ROM area. Breaks set by default can also be changed in the Extended Option dialog box . Figure 5-1 Breakpoint Setting
(2) Deleting a breakpoint method Click the position at which the breakpoint to be deleted is set. At the same time as setting is performed, in the default setting, software breakpoint (B) is deleted, but if [Breakpoint] is selected in the context menu, hardware breakpoint (B, or B) is deleted. another event remains, however, the mark of that event is displayed. As a result of deletion, If
42
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
events have been set is marked (refer to "Table 6-8
Event Setting Status (Event Mark)").
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 4. 3
Setting break to variable
Access break setting to variables can easily be done from the context menu in the Source window or the Watch window. Figure 5-2 Setting Break to Variable
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
43
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 4. 4
Hardware break and software break
(1) Hardware break Hardware breaks are breaks that are set using one hardware resource per event condition. Therefore, in the ID78K0-QB, they are managed using "5. 11 Event Function" as break event conditions. The number of valid break points varies depending on the device (refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition"). (2) Software break Software breaks are breaks that are set by rewriting instructions of specified addresses to software break instructions. Therefore, the number of software breaks that can be set is not limited, but settings to external ROM, stopping at variable access timing, etc., cannot be specified. Table 5-8 The Number of Valid Software Break Connected IE IECUBE MINICUBE 2000
Software break is managed by the Software Break Manager. Figure 5-3 Management of Software Breaks
44
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Valid Number
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 4. 5
Fail-safe break
The fail-safe break settings are performed in the Fail-safe Break dialog box. Individual settings are possible by selecting check boxes. Figure 5-4 Fail-safe Break Setting
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
45
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 5
Program Execution Function
The program execution function is used to start execution of the user program by the CPU and operation of the tracer. Through user program execution, the PC advances until the set breakpoint or forced break. Break Function".) While the user program is being executed, trace event condition and timer event condition can be set. (Refer to " Trace dialog box"," Timer dialog box".) The following types of ID78K0-QB execution functions are provided. buttons on the toolbar , or from the [Run] menu. Figure 5-5 Execution Button They are operated using the execution (Refer to "5. 4
Items [Restart]
The CPU is reset and the user program is executed starting from RESET address. This is the same operation as "resetting the CPU before execution of the user program and executing [Go]". The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register and is stopped if a set break event condition is satisfied. The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register Execution of the user program continues, ignoring set breakpoints. The user program is executed until execution returns to the calling function described in C language. In the Source window,Step execution of one line of the source text is performed starting from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated. In the Assemble window,One instruction is executed from the current PC register value and the contents of each window are updated.
[Go] [Ignore break points and Go] [Return Out] [Step In]
46
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 5-9
Type of Execution Contents
Figure 5-6
[Run] Menu
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
Items [Next Over]
Contents CALL / CALLT / CALLF instruction Next step execution is performed, assuming the function or subroutine called by the CALL / CALLT / CALLF instruction as one step (step execution continues until the nesting level becomes the same as when the CALL / CALLT / CALLF instruction was executed). Instruction other than CALL / CALLT / CALLF The same processing as [Step In] is performed. This command executes the user program starting from the specified address. Execution of the user program is stopped when a set break event condition is satisfied. The user program is executed from the address indicated by the current PC register to the address selected in the line/address display area of the Source window or the Assemble window, and then a break occurs. While the user program is being executed, the break event currently set does not occur. The user program is executed starting from the address indicated by the current PC register and stopped if a set break event condition is satisfied. The contents of each window are updated, and execution of the user program is resumed from the address at which the program was stopped. This operation is repeated until the user executes [Stop]. Step execution of one line is performed from the address indicated by the current PC register value in the source mode. In the instruction mode, step execution of one instruction is performed. The contents of each window are updated each time step execution is performed. This operation is repeated until the user executes [Stop].
[Start From Here]
[Come Here]
[Go & Go]
[Slowmotion]
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
47
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 6
Watch Function
This section explains the following items about watch function. - Displaying and changing data value - Displaying and changing local variable values - Registering and deleting watch data - Changing watch data - Temporarily displaying and changing data values - Toolbar watch function - Stack trace display function 5. 6. 1 Displaying and changing data value Shifts in data values can be checked by
Displaying and changing data values is done in the Watch window. registering watch data.
Specification of the display format is done in the Debugger Option dialog box. Figure 5-7 Watch Window
48
Figure 5-8
Specification of the Display Format (Debugger Option dialog box)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 6. 2
Displaying and changing local variable values
Displaying and changing local variable values is done in the Local Variable window. Local variables within the current function are automatically displayed in this window. (Variable addition/deletion is not possible.) Figure 5-9 Local Variable Window
5. 6. 3
Registering and deleting watch data
Data registration to the Watch window can be done from the Source window or the Assemble window. This is simply done by selecting the variable or symbol name in the respective window, and then clicking the button. Registration is also possible with the following method. - Drag and drop the selected variable or symbol name directly on the Watch window. (Refer to "5. 14. 4 Drag & drop function".) - Click the button in the Quick Watch dialog box or the Add Watch dialog box. To delete watch data, click the variable name or symbol name (multiple selections can also be made using the Shift key or Ctrl key), and then click the button. However, lines with an expanded hierarchy, such as
elements of an array, and members of structures and unions, cannot be deleted.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
49
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 6. 4
Changing watch data
Changing watch data is done in the Change Watch dialog box. Changing a symbol name is permitted even when any existing data of symbols of the same name has already existed. Figure 5-10 Change Watch Dialog Box
5. 6. 5
Temporarily displaying and changing data values
Temporarily displaying and changing data values is done in the Quick Watch dialog box. Select the desired variable or symbol name in the Source window or the Assemble window and lick the button to perform watch data registration. The display code type, display size, and display count can all be changed in this window. Figure 5-11 Quick Watch dialog box
5. 6. 6
Toolbar watch function
The corresponding variable value pops up when the mouse cursor is placed over a selected variable in the Source window or the Assemble window.
50
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 6. 7
Stack trace display function
This function displays stack contents of the current user program in the Stack Trace window. Figure 5-12 Stack Trace Window
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
51
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 7
Memory Manipulation Function
This section explains the following items related to the memory manipulation: Verify check specification, etc., is done in the Extended Option dialog box. - Displaying and changing memory contents - Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents - Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected) - Flash memory writing function (when MINICUBE connected) 5. 7. 1 Displaying and changing memory contents
In the Memory window, the memory contents can be displayed or changed by using mnemonic codes, hexadecimal codes, and ASCII codes. Search is done in the Memory Search dialog box displayed by clicking the button. The result of search is highlighted in the Memory window. The display start position can be changed in the Address move dialog box displayed by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. The variables and data allocated to the real-time internal RAM sampling range can be displayed in real time even during program execution. (Refer to "5. 12 The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) Caution The address width changes when memory banks are used. Figure 5-13 Displaying and Changing Memory Contents
52
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 7. 2
Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents
Filling, copying, and comparing memory contents is done in the Memory Fill dialog box, the Memory Copy dialog box, and the Memory Compare dialog box displayed by selecting [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Fill.../Copy.../ Compare.... ]. The comparison results are displayed in the Memory Compare Result dialog box. Caution 5. 7. 3 The address width changes when memory banks are used.
Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected)
The access monitor function displays the access status (read, write, read & write) for the sampling range of the The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected) using different colors in the Memory window. The access monitor color-marking function is executed only during byte display. Colors are not displayed in the ASCII display area. Cumulative display setting and access status display can be cleared by selecting [View] menu -> [Access Monitoring]. Figure 5-14 Access Monitor function (Memory Window)
5. 7. 4
Flash memory writing function (when MINICUBE connected)
With the ID78K0-QB, the internal flash memory can be written and the load module can be downloaded by the same access method as an ordinary memory operation. The data on the internal flash memory can be changed from the Memory window, Assemble window, Watch window, Memory Fill dialog box, and Memory Copy dialog box, without having to be aware that the data is that of the internal flash memory. The load module can also be downloaded to the internal flash memory by using the flash self-programming function. Caution No data can be written to the internal flash memory during user program execution.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
53
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 8
Register Manipulation Function
This section explains the following items about register manipulation function. - Displaying and changing register contents - Displaying and changing SFR contents - Displaying and changing I/O port contents 5. 8. 1 Displaying and changing register contents
Register contents can be displayed and changed in the Register window. Register name display switching (absolute name/function name) can be done in the Debugger Option dialog box. Figure 5-15 Absolute Name/Function Name Switching
Function Name Pair Register ax Register x a bc c b de e d hl l h rp3 rp2 rp1 Pair Register rp0
54
Table 5-10
Absolute Name to Function Name Correspondence Absolute Name Register r0 r1 r2 r3 r4 r5 r6 r7
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 8. 2
Displaying and changing SFR contents
SFR contents can be displayed and changed in the SFR window. The display start position can be changed in the Address move dialog box displayed by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. Display register selection is done in the SFR Select dialog box. Figure 5-16 Displaying SFR Contents
5. 8. 3
Displaying and changing I/O port contents
User-defined I/O ports can be displayed and changed in the SFR window once they have been registered in the Add I/O Port dialog box. In the case of products that support programmable I/O registers, programmable I/O register contents can be displayed and changed by setting programmable I/O area use in the Configuration dialog box. Figure 5-17 Register I/O Port
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
55
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 9
Timer Function (When IECUBE Connected)
The timer function measures the execution time (Run-Break time) from the start of user program execution until a break, or the execution time in a specific user program interval using timer events. - Timer event conditions - Run-Break event Remark Timer event condition setting/enable/disable/delete operations are possible even during user program execution. 5. 9. 1 Timer event conditions
A timer event condition specifies the trigger by which time measurement is started or stopped. Timer event conditions are set in the Timer dialog box. (Refer to "5. 11 Event Function".) In the ID78K0-QB, timeout break settings can be performed in the Time Out Break area. Figure 5-18 Sets and DisplaysTimer Event (Timer Dialog Box)
Continuous display in the Timer Result dialog box can be selected by clicking the button. Timer manipulations during program execution are performed by selecting [Run] menu -> [Timer Start/Timer Stop].
56
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 9. 2
Run-Break event
Run-Break event is a timer event name given to a timer event condition that measures the execution time from execution to break. Run-break events are registered in advance and the run-break time can be displayed through specification in the Timer dialog box. The Run-Break time is also displayed in the status bar in the Main window. Since Run-Break events are not included in the number of timer events that can be simultaneously enabled (refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition"), they can be used added to the number of valid timer event conditions.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
57
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 10
Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)
The trace function of the ID78K0-QB traces the branch instructions of the user program and saves the execution flow to the trace memory. - Trace memory - Checking trace data - Mixed display mode (Trace window) - Tracer Operation - Setting conditional trace Remark Trace event condition setting/enable/disable/delete operations are possible even during user program execution. In this case, the tracer operation is momentarily stopped during manipulation. 5. 10. 1 Trace memory
ID78K0-QB has trace memory with a ring structure. Size specification is done in the Extended Option dialog box. The maximum trace memory capacity is as follows.
Connected IE IECUBE 128 KB
58
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 5-11
Trace memory size Maximum value
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 10. 2
Checking trace data
The trace data saved to the trace memory can be checked in the Trace window. Trace data can be searched in the Trace Search dialog box displayed by clicking the button. The display start position can be changed in the Trace move dialog box displayed by selecting [View] menu -> [Move...]. The display items in the Trace window can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box. Figure 5-19 Checking Trace Data
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
59
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 10. 3
Mixed display mode (Trace window)
Source file display combined with trace results can be done by selecting [View] menu -> [Mix] in the Trace window (mixed display mode). If a program code corresponds on the program fetch address to be displayed, a source file line is displayed before the line indicating the result of tracing that program fetch address.
The source file line is displayed, emphasized in green. Caution The mixed display mode is valid only when the load module has been downloaded and symbol information is read, and when a fetch address, fetch data, fetch status, or result of disassembly is displayed. 5. 10. 4 Tracer Operation
The trace operation differs as follows according to the user program execution format and the tracer control mode. Tracer manipulations during program execution are performed by selecting [Run] menu -> [Tracer Start/ Tracer Stop]. (1) Operation during execution The tracer operation differs as follows according to [Run] menu -> [Uncond. Trace ON/Cond. Trace ON] selection.
Item Unconditional trace Conditional trace
Trace is started when execution of user program, and ends when a break occurs. At this time, the set trace event conditions are ignored. Trace is started or stopped by the condition set in the Trace dialog box (refer to "5. 10. 5 Setting conditional trace"). If a break occurs while a trace is being executed, however, trace is stopped immediately.
(2) Operation during Step In execution The tracer operates every step execution, and trace data of one step is successively added to the trace memory. (3) Operation during Next Over execution The operation of the tracer differs depending on the instruction to which Next Over is to be executed. (a) CALL/CALLT/CALLF instructions
60
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 5-12
Type of Trace Modes Contents
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
The CALL / CALLT / CALLF instruction and the subroutine that was called are traced. (b) Other instructions The same operation as that during Step In execution is performed. (4) Tracer control mode There are the following types of trace control mode. These trace mode settings are performed from the [Run] menu.
Table 5-13 Types of Tracer Control Mode Mode Non Stop Full Stop Full Break Delay Trigger Stop Delay Trigger Break
Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest frame (default). Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer. Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program execution Traces data by the number of delay count frames and stops the tracer when a delay trigger event has occurred. Traces data by the number of delay count frames and stops the tracer and program execution when a delay trigger event has occurred.
5. 10. 5
Setting conditional trace
A trace event condition triggers starting/stopping trace execution when a conditional trace is set. By setting a trace event condition in the Trace dialog box, the conditional trace can be set (refer to "5. 11 Event Function"). There are the following types of conditional trace. In the ID78K0-QB, all the following conditional traces can be set as one trace event condition.
Table 5-14 Types of Conditional Trace Item Section trace
Executes a trace between two specified conditions (in a specific zone). A section trace can be executed by setting a trace start event and trace end event in the Trace dialog box and selecting [Run] menu -> [Cond. Trace ON]. In the ID78K0-QB, up to 4 ranges can be specified simultaneously. Executes a trace only when a condition is satisfied. If two or more events are set as qualify trace events, a qualify trace can be executed by executing a conditional trace. A qualify trace can be executed by setting a qualify trace event in the Trace dialog box and selecting [Run] menu -> [Cond. Trace ON]. Executes a trace by the number of delay counts after a condition has been satisfied. A delay trigger trace can be executed by setting a delay trigger event in the Trace dialog box, setting a delay count in the Delay Count dialog box and selecting [Run] menu -> [Cond. Trace ON]. In this case, select [Delay Trigger Stop] , [Delay Trigger Break] .
Qualify trace
Delay trigger trace
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Contents
Contents, Setting method
61
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 11
Event Function
Events specify specific states of the target system during debugging ,such as "Fetched address 0x1000" or "Wrote data to address 0x2000". In ID78K0-QB, such events are used as action triggers for each debugging function, such as break and trace. - Using event function - Creating events - Setting event conditions - Number of enabled events for each event condition - Managing events 5. 11. 1 Using event function
Events (event conditions) consist of the event conditions listed in the following table, by assigning various debugging functions. As a result, event conditions can be utilized according to the debugging purpose.
Event Condition Break event
Mark B
Condition in which the execution of the user program or operation of a tracer is stopped. (refer to "5. 4 Break Function"). -> Break dialog box Condition in which the process of user program execution is saved to the trace memory (refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). -> Trace dialog box Condition for specifying the time measurement start timing and stop timing (refer to "5. 9 Timer Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). -> Timer dialog box
Trace event
T
Timer event
Ti
62
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 5-15
Various Event Conditions Contents ->Setting Dialog Box
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 11. 2
Creating events
Events can be used as action triggers of various event conditions described before through registration of event conditions , individually naming states called events. (1) Creating and registering events The creation of event conditions is done in the Event dialog box. Set an address condition, status condition, and data condition in this dialog box. Specify a combination of these as one event condition and name and register this event condition. A simple method consists in using event conditions generated by setting breakpoint in the, Source window and the Assemble window. (Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting".) 5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions are individually created in the corresponding dialog box.
(1) Setting of various event conditions The setting of the various event conditions is done by selecting the event icon of the desired event condition displayed in the event manager area (or Event Manager) in the respective setting dialog box, and dragging and dropping this icon in the condition area to be set. Figure 5-20 Setting of Various Event Conditions
The shape of the mouse cursor changes to "OK" when it is dragged over a settable condition area. Regarding the created event conditions, the event icon mark becomes red and the setting is enabled by clicking the button or the button in the Setting dialog box. After the event has been set, a debugging action occurs as various event conditions.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Various event conditions listed in Table 5-15
63
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
(2) Settings using selection mode (settings after checking contents) The Event dialog box are open in the "selection mode" by placing the focus on the condition area to be set and then clicking the button . Because when a condition set in the dialog box is selected, the
corresponding detailed condition is displayed, conditions can be set after checking the contents. (3) Copying and moving event icons In the event condition setting area, event conditions can be copied and moved through drag & drop operation using the following methods. - If event condition was dropped using only the mouse, move event condition. - If the event condition was dropped while pressing the Ctrl key, copy the event condition. (4) Manipulation in event manager area Event conditions can be set by clicking the button after placing the focus on the condition area to be set and selecting an event icon. - Event setting content display Select an event and click the button or double-click the event. The setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event will be opened and the set contents of the event will be displayed. - Deletion An event can be deleted by selecting the event and then clicking the button or pressing the Delete key. - Changing display mode and sorting The display mode of and sorting in the event manager area can be selected by clicking the button. - Area non-display An area can be hidden by clicking the button.
64
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 11. 4
Number of enabled events for each event condition
Up to 256 conditions can be registered as event conditions or various event conditions. One event condition can be set for multiple types of events such as break, trace, and timer. However, the number of event conditions that can be simultaneously set (enabled) is limited as follows. Therefore, if the valid number is exceeded or if the used event conditions exceed the maximum number that can be used simultaneously, it is necessary to disable the set various event conditions once and then register them again. (Refer to "5. 11. 5 Managing events".) Caution Except for pre-execution events, event conditions for which the address range or data range has been set use 2 event conditions internally, so the number of event conditions that can be used simultaneously will be reduced according to the number of those event conditions.
Connected IE Execute IECUBE MINICUBE 24a 1 Access 10b 1
a. b. c. d.
Including 16 break before executions 8 dedicated byte access events and 2 dedicated word access events Up to 4 section trace events, 1 qualify trace, and 1 delay trigger trace can be set simultaneously. 1 event link reserved during software break use
Table 5-16
Number of enabled events for each event condition Event Event Link -
Break
Trace
Timer 2
34a 2d
1c -
-
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
65
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 11. 5
Managing events
Managing events is done with the Event Manager. The Event Manager allows display, enabling/disabling, and deletion of the Various Event Conditions. Figure 5-21 Managing Events (Event Manager)
(1) Event icons Event icons consist of a mark and an event name indicating the type of event. The color of each event icon indicates the setting status of that event. Enable/disable is switched by clicking the mark part.
Charac ter Color Red E.
Mark
Indicates that the event condition which is used for various event conditions is valid. Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is valid. The various events occur when its condition is satisfied. Indicates that the event condition which is used for various event conditions is invalid. Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is invalid. The various events do not occur even when its condition is satisfied. Indicates that the symbol specified for an event is held pending because it cannot be recognized by the program currently loaded. Indicates that the Various Event Conditions is held pending. The various events do not occur even when its condition is satisfied.
B.T.Ti. Black E. B.T.Ti. Yellow E. L. B.T.Ti.
66
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 5-17 Event icon
Meaning
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 12
The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected)
The real-time monitor function (RRM function) displays in real time the variables allocated to the sampling range, data, etc., in the Watch window or the Memory window. Access statuses (read, write, read & write) are displayed using different colors in the Memory window using this function (refer to "5. 7. 3 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected)"). - Sampling range setting - Sampling time setting 5. 12. 1 Sampling range setting
Sampling of the entire memory space is possible. 5. 12. 2 Sampling time setting
Setting of the sampling time for the RRM function is done in the Extended Option dialog box. Values are updated at the specified time interval. Figure 5-22 Sampling Time Setting
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
67
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 13
Load/Save Function
ID78K0-QB allows saving and loading the following types of information as files. As a result, recovery of these various types of information is possible. - Debugging environment (project file) - Window display information (view file) - Window setting information (setting file) Remark The simple window status can be maintained by selecting [Window] menu -> [Static]. (Refer to "5. 14. 1 Active status and static status".) 5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)
A project file (*.prj) is a file that records the debugging environment. A project file is created when the debugging environment at a particular point in time is saved, and that debugging environment can be restored by loading this file at a subsequent time. Loading and saving project files are done in the Project File Save dialog box and the Project File Load dialog box, respectively. To load a project file at startup, press the button in the Configuration dialog box. (1) Automatic save/automatic load of project file The project file to be loaded/saved when performing startup and end in the Debugger Option dialog box can also be set in advance. Figure 5-23 Automatic Save/Automatic Load Setting for Project File
68
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
(2) Contents saved to project File The following contents are saved to the project file: Table 5-18 Window Name Configuration dialog box Main window Download dialog box Extended Option dialog box Debugger Option dialog box Fail-safe Break dialog box Mask Option dialog box* Source window Assemble window Memory window Stack Trace window SFR window Local Variable window Trace window* Event Manager Console window Expansion window Event dialog box Break dialog box Trace dialog box* Timer dialog box* Register window Watch window Add I/O Port dialog box Delay Count dialog box* Software Break Manager Contents Saved to Project File Saved Contents All items (target device, clock setting, pin mask setting, mapping information) Display position, tool bar/status bar/button display information, execution mode information, trace on/off information File information to be downloaded Set information
*
When IECUBE connected
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Display information of window Display information of window, display start address Display information of window
Display information of window, event information Display information of window, break event information Display information of window, trace event information Display information of window, timer event information Display information of window Display information of window, watch registration information Added I/O port information Delay count value Display information of window, software break information
69
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 13. 2
Window display information (view file)
A view file is a file that records window display information. View files can be loaded and saved for each window. When a view file is loaded, a reference window (Source window in static status) is displayed and the display information at the time of saving is displayed. Loading and saving of view files are done in the View File Load dialog box and the View File Save dialog box, respectively. Table 5-19 Type of the View Files Target Window File Name Source window View file of the Source window Assemble window View file of the Assemble window Memory window View file of the Memory window Watch window View file of the Watch window Register window View file of the Register window SFR window View file of the SFR window Local Variable window View file of the Local Variable window Stack Trace window View file of the Stack Trace window Trace window* View file of the Trace window Console window View file of the Console window All files Source fileNote Text file
File Type Source Text (*.svw) Assemble (*.dis) Memory (*.mem) Watch (*.wch) Register (*.rgw) SFR (*.sfr) Local Variable (*.loc) Stack Trace (*.stk) Trace (*.tvw) Console (*.log) All (*.*) Source (*.c, *.s, *.asm) (During downloading) Text (*.txt)
Note *
The extension of the source file can be changed in the Extended Option dialog box. When IECUBE connected
70
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 13. 3
Window setting information (setting file)
A setting file is a file that records the window setting information (watch data settings, SFR settings, and event settings). Setting files can be loaded and saved for each window. When a setting file is loaded, the target window is displayed and the setting information that was saved is restored. Loading and saving of setting files are done in the Environment Setting File Load dialog box and the Environment Setting File Save dialog box, respectively. Table 5-20 Type of the Setting Files Target Window File Name Watch window Setting file of the Watch window SFR window Setting file of the SFR window Event Manager Setting file of event
File Type Watch (*.wch)Note SFR (*.sfr)Note Event (*.evn)
Note
A variable value can be loaded.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
71
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 14
Functions Common to Various Windows
The target windows have the following common functions. - Active status and static status - Jump function - Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected) - Drag & drop function - Cautions 5. 14. 1 Active status and static status
The Source window that is displaying the source file to which symbol information is read, Assemble window and Memory window has two statuses: Only one window can be opened in the active status. However, because two or more windows in the static status can be opened, the current status of the windows can be temporarily held. Select this status by the [Window] menu. (1) Active status The display position and contents of the window in the active status are automatically updated in association with the current PC value. This window is also the jump destination of the jump function. If this window is linked with the Trace window, the contents displayed in the active window are updated in association with the Trace window. Only one window can be opened in the active status. (2) Static status The display position of the window in the static status does not move in association with the current PC value, but the displayed contents are updated. The static window is not used as the jump destination of the jump function. In addition, it is not linked with the Trace window. If an active window is already open, the next window is opened in the static status. Two or more static windows can be opened at the same time.
72
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 14. 2
Jump function
The jump function is used to jump to Source window, Assemble window or Memory window from a jump pointer that is the line or address on which the cursor is placed, and display the contents of the jump destination window from the jump pointer. You can jump among the above windows, or from Trace window, Stack Trace window, Event Manager and Register window to the above windows. (1) Jump method The jump method is as follows: 1) Move the cursor to the line or address that is to be used as the jump pointer, on the window from which jumping is possible (select an event icon on the Event Manager). 2) Select the following menu item to which execution is to jump from the [Jump] menu. Source window -> Select [Source Text] Assemble window -> Select [Assemble] Memory window -> Select [Memory] Caution If a program code does not exist on the line at the cursor position, the first address of the line with a program code above or below that line is used as the jump pointer. (2) Details of jump source address The details of jump source address is as follows:
Table 5-21 Details of Jump Source Address Target Window From the Register window From the Memory window From the Event Manager
Registers selected (the PC address width changes when memory banks are used.) Address at the cursor position If the selected event icon is that of an event condition, an address condition is used as the jump pointer. If the address condition is set in point If the address condition is set in range If the address condition is set in bit Jump to specified address Jump to lower address (point address before the mask if a mask is specified) Jump to address at the bit position
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Details of Jump Pointer
73
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
Table 5-21 Details of Jump Source Address Target Window From the Stack Trace window
A function at the cursor position that stack flame number indicates is used as the jump pointer. With current function If the jump destination is the Source window Other than above Jumps to the current PC line Jumps to the current PC address
With function other than current function If the jump destination is the Source window Other than above From the Trace window Jump to the Memory window If the cursor position is at an access address, access data, or access status Other than above Jump to the Source window or Assemble window Fetch address Access address Jump to the line that calls a nested function. Jump to the address next to the instruction that calls a nested function.
74
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Details of Jump Pointer
Fetch address
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 14. 3
Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected)
By linking Trace window with each window (Source window, Assemble window or Memory window), the corresponding part can be displayed on the linked window, by using the address at the cursor position on the Trace window as a pointer. If the cursor is moved on the Trace window, the corresponding part on the linked window is highlighted or indicated by the cursor position. (1) Linking method 1) 2) Set the Trace window as the current window. Select [View] menu -> [Window Synchronize] to select a window to be linked. Source window -> Select [Source Text] Assemble window -> Select [Assemble] Memory window ->Select [Memory] 3) 4) Move the cursor to the line to be linked in the trace result display area of the Trace window. Using the address of the line selected in 3 as a pointer, the corresponding part is highlighted (or indicated by the cursor position) in the display area of the window selected in 2. Caution The linking source address differs as follows depending on the cursor position in the trace result display area if the Memory window is linked. Access address, access data, access status -> Access address Others -> Fetch address When the Source window or Assemble window is linked, the fetch address is always used as the pointer.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
75
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 14. 4
Drag & drop function
Line numbers, addresses, and text highlighted by selecting them can be dragged and dropped in another window using the following method. 1) Drag the selected line number, address, or text. -> The shape of the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to "-". 2) Drop the selection in a window or area where it can be dropped. -> The shape of the cursor changes from "-" to "OK" when the cursor is placed over a window or area where the selection can be dropped. In the window in which the line number of the address has been dropped, an operation is performed on the dropped address or the address that is obtained from the dropped line number. For example, a variable can be simply registered by dragging and dropping in the Watch window such a variable located in the Source window. (1) Drag & drop details The operation to be performed after dropping the line number or address differs, depending on the window or area in which the line number or address has been dropped.
Table 5-22 Details of Drag & Drop Function (Line/Address) Window/Area to Drop to The Event Manager or the event manager area in each various event setting dialog box
Automatically creates an execution event condition by using the dropped line number or address as an address condition. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. A path count is not specified. The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name + offset value. Automatically creates an execution event condition by using the dropped line number or address as an address condition. The automatically created event condition is set in each condition setting area in which the line number or address has been dropped. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. A path count is not specified. The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name + offset value. The text of the dropped line number or address is set in the area in which the line number or address has been dropped. The address condition is set for the closest symbol in the format of symbol name + offset value.
Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (other than address and data setting areas)
Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (address and data setting areas)
76
Operation After Drop
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
Window/Area to Drop to The Event Manager or the event manager area in each various event setting dialog box
If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an address value, an event condition in the Access status (all access statuses) or Execute status is automatically created, using the converted address value as an address condition. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. A data condition and path count are not specified. The address condition is set by the dropped text. The relationship between the event condition to be created and the symbol is as follows: Symbols Variable Function Symbol in data section Symbol in code section Others Status Access(R/W) Execute Access(R/W) Execute Access (R/W)
Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (other than address and data setting areas)
If the dropped text can be converted as a symbol into an address value, an event condition in the Access status (all access statuses) or Execute status is automatically created, using the converted address value as an address condition. The automatically created event condition is set in each condition setting area in which the line number or address has been dropped. Event condition names are automatically created as Evt00001, Evt00002, and so on. A data condition and path count are not specified. The address condition is set by the dropped text. The relationship between the event condition to be created and the symbol is as follows: Symbols Variable Function Symbol in data section Symbol in code section Others Status Access(R/W) Execute Access (R/W) Execute Access (R/W)
Condition setting area in each various event setting dialog box (address and data setting areas) Watch window
The dropped text is set in the area.
If the dropped text is recognizable as a symbol, the contents of the symbol are displayed.
Caution
The various event setting dialog boxes include the Event dialog box, Break dialog box, Trace dialog box and Timer dialog box.
Table 5-23
Details of Drag & Drop Function (Character String) Operation After Drop
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
77
CHAPTER 5 DEBUG FUNCTION
5. 14. 5
Cautions
(a) The number of characters that can be displayed on 1 line in each area of a window is 319. (b) If the width of the display area is narrow, the display may become corrupted. In this case, increase the width of the window. (c) When scrolling is performed using the cursor keys in the Mixed display mode (Source window), excessive scrolling may occur. Also, scrolling down to the last line may not be possible using the cursor keys. (d) If the screen resolution is low (800 - 600, etc.), all the statuses may not be displayed on the status bar. (e) The help that is opened using the F1 key is the help corresponding to the window on which the cursor is placed. Consequently, because the cursor cannot be placed on the Trace window in which no trace results are displayed, such as immediately after startup, the help may not open even if the F1 key is pressed. In this case, open the help by selecting [Current Window Help] from the [Help] menu. (f) Do not select [Slowmotion] from the [Run] menu during Go & Go execution. [Slowmotion] on the [Run] menu is usually dimmed during Go & Go execution, but there is a moment when it can be selected, so if [Slowmotion] is selected at this time, the program will not be able to be stopped even if [Stop] is selected from the [Run] menu (or the STOP button is pressed).
78
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
This chapter explains in detail the functions of the windows and dialog boxes of ID78K0-QB. - Window List - Explanation of Windows
6. 1
Window List
The list is the windows of the ID78K0-QB. Table 6-1 Window Name Main window Window List Contents This window is displayed first, when the ID78K0-QB is started. It controls execution of the user program. Various windows are opened from this window. Displays and sets the ID78K0-QB operation environment. Displays and sets the extended options of the ID78K0-QB. Sets the fail-safe breaks Sets the mask options and pin mode (IECUBE) Displays and sets other options. Saves the current debug environment to project file Loads the debug environment. Loads an object file and binary file. Saves the memory contents to a file. Displays a source file and text file Searches in the Source window Specifies a file to be displayed in the Source window and the position from which displaying the file is to be started. Disassembles the program and executes online assembly. Searches in the Assemble window Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Memory window or Assemble window. Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol Displays and changes specified watch data Displays temporarily specified watch data Registers watch data todisplay in the Watch window
Configuration dialog box Extended Option dialog box Fail-safe Break dialog box Mask Option dialog box Debugger Option dialog box Project File Save dialog box Project File Load dialog box Download dialog box Upload dialog box Source window Source Search dialog box Source Text move dialog box Assemble window Assemble Search dialog box Address move dialog box Symbol To Address dialog box Watch window Quick Watch dialog box Add Watch dialog box
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
79
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Window Name Change Watch dialog box Local Variable window Stack Trace window Memory window Memory Search dialog box Memory Fill dialog box Memory Copy dialog box Memory Compare dialog box Memory Compare Result dialog box Register window SFR window SFR Select dialog box Add I/O Port dialog box Timer dialog box Timer Result dialog box Trace window Trace Search dialog box Trace Data Select dialog box Trace move dialog box Trace dialog box Delay Count dialog box Event Manager Software Break Manager Event dialog box Break dialog box View File Save dialog box View File Load dialog box Environment Setting File Save dialog box Environment Setting File Load dialog box Reset Debugger dialog box Exit Debugger dialog box
Contents Changes watch data todisplay in the Watch window Displays and changes the local variable in the current function. Displays the current stack contents Displays the contents of memory. Searches in the Memory window Fills the memory contents with specified data. Copies the memory. Compares the memory. Displays the result of comparing the memory. Displays the contents of registers. Displays the contents of SFR Selects SFR and I/O ports to be displayed in the SFR window Registers an I/O port to be displayed in the SFR window. Registers and sets timer event conditions, and displays execution time measurement result, and . (IECUBE) Displays execution time measurement results. (IECUBE) Displays trace results. (IECUBE) Searches trace data. (IECUBE) Selects items to be displayed in the Trace window.(IECUBE) Specifies the start address to display the contents of the Trace window. (IECUBE) Registers and sets trace event conditions. (IECUBE) Sets the delay count of a delay trigger trace event.(IECUBE) Displays, enables/disables, and deletes each event condition. Display, enable or disable, and delete software breaks. Registers event conditions. Registers and sets break event conditions. Saves the display information of the current window to a view file. Loads the view file of each window. Saves the setting information of the current window to a setting file. Loads the setting file of each window. Initializes the ID78K0-QB,CPU, and symbol information. Terminates the ID78K0-QB.
80
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Window Name About dialog box Console window Font dialog box Browse dialog box
Contents Displays the version of the ID78K0-QB. Inputs commands. Displays the types of fonts displayed. Selects the file to be set
6. 2
Explanation of Windows
This section explains each window or dialog box as follows:
Window Name / Dialog box Name
Briefly explains the function of the window or dialog box and points to be noted. If an invalid window/dialog box exists due to a connected IE, the name of the valid connected IE is indicated at the lower right of the window/dialog box name. In addition, the display image of the window or dialog box is also illustrated. Items of related operation are also explained.
Opening Explains how to open the window or dialog box.
Explanation of each area Explains items to be set to or displayed in each area of the window or dialog box.
Context menu Explains the context menu that is displayed in the window when the right mouse button is clicked. From the
context menu, convenient functions often used in this window can be selected with a single action (window only). Note that each menu item functions for the selected line or item, not at the place the mouse pointer was clicked (this is the same operation as when the main menu of the same name is selected).
Function buttons Explains the operation of each button in the window or dialog box.
Related operations Explains the operation of a window or dialog box related to this window or dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
81
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Main window
This window is automatically opened when the ID78K0-QB is started up and initialized.
Execution of the user program is controlled in this window. Execution of the user program is controlled in the following three modes: - Source mode (Debugs the user program at the source level.) - Instruction mode (Debugs the user program at the instruction level.) - Auto mode (Automatically selects the source mode or instruction mode.) Figure 6-1 Main Window
- Menu bar - Toolbar - Window display area - Status bar
Menu bar (1) [File] menu (2) [Edit] menu (3) [View] menu (4) [Option] menu (5) [Run]menu (6) [Event] menu (7) [Browse] menu (8) [Jump] menu
82
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
In ID78K0-QB, other windows are manipulated from this window (refer to "Table 6-1
Window List").
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(9) [Window] menu (10) [Help] menu (1) [File] menu Open... Loads a view file, source file, or text file. Opens the View File Load dialog box. The operation differs depending on the extension of the file selected in the dialog box. Saves the contents displayed on the current window to the file whose name is specified. Opens the View File Save dialog box. Closes the current window. Downloads a file. Opens the Download dialog box. Uploads a program. Opens the Upload dialog box. Manipulates a project file. Opens a project file. Opens the Project File Load dialog box. Overwrites the current status to the project file currently being read to the ID78K0-QB. Saves the current status to a specified project file. Opens the Project File Save dialog box. Manipulates a setting file. Opens a setting file. Opens the Environment Setting File Load dialog box. Saves the setting in the current window to the setting file. Opens the Environment Setting File Save dialog box. Initializes the CPU, symbols, and ID78K0-QB. Opens the Reset Debugger dialog box. Terminate the ID78K0-QB. Opens the Exit Debugger dialog box. Lists the names of the files opened.
Save As...
Close Download... Upload... Project Open... Save Save As... Environment Open... Save As... Debugger Reset... Exit (Open file) (2) [Edit] menu Cut Copy Paste Write in Restore Memory
Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position. Writes the modified contents to the target. Cancels the modification. Manipulates the memory contents.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
83
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Fill... Copy... Compare... Edit Source
Fills the memory contents with specified codes. Opens the Memory Fill dialog box. Copies the memory. Opens the Memory Copy dialog box. Compares the memory. Opens the Memory Compare dialog box. Opens the source file displayed in the active Source window with the editor specified by the PM plus when the PM plus runs.
(3) [View] menu The [View] menu contains common parts as well as dedicated parts added according to the active window. For details about the dedicated parts, refer to the description of each window. (a) Common items Search... Performs a search. Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window. Same operation as the button. Moves the display position. Opens the specification dialog box corresponding to the current window. Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box. Registers the specified data to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Adds the selected data to the Watch window. If the data is a symbol, it is added in accordance with the setting of Debugger Option dialog box. Changes the data on the line selected by the Watch window. Opens the Change Watch dialog box. This menu is valid only when a variable is selected in Watch window. Deletes the selected watch point from the Watch window. This menu is valid only when a variable is selected in Watch window. Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box.
Move... Quick Watch... Add Watch... View Watch
Change Watch...
Delete Watch Symbol...
(4) [Option] menu Tool Bar Status Bar Button Source Mode Instruction Mode Selects whether the tool bar is displayed (default) or not. Selects whether the status bar is displayed (default) or not. Selects whether the buttons on each window are displayed (default) or not. Executes step execution at the source level (in line units). Executes step execution at the instruction level (in instruction units).
84
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Auto Mode
Automatically selects step execution at the source level or step execution at the instruction level (default). Step execution is performed at the source level (in a mode other than mixed display mode) if the Source window is active. It is performed at the instruction level if the Assemble window is active. If neither window is active, step execution is performed at the source level. Sets the environment. Opens the Configuration dialog box. Performs the mask option settings and pin mode settings (when IECUBE connected). Opens the Mask Option dialog box. Sets extended options. Opens the Extended Option dialog box. Sets ID78K0-QB options. Opens the Debugger Option dialog box. Adds user-defined I/O ports. Opens the Add I/O Port dialog box. Clears the trace data. This item is displayed only when the Trace window is active (when IECUBE connected). Cannot be selected.
Configuration... Mask Option...
Extended Option... Debugger Option... Add I/O Port ... Trace Clear
Coverage (5) [Run]menu Restart
Resets the CPU and executes the program. Same operation as the ReGo button
Stop
Forcibly stops program execution. Same operation as the Stop button
Go
Executes the program from the current PC. Same operation as the Go button
Ignore break points and Go
Ignores break points being set, and executes the program. Same operation as the GoN button
Return Out
The user program is executed until execution returns. Note: This command is used for a function described in C language. Same operation as the Ret button
Step In
Executes the instructions in the program one by one (step execution). If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are executed one by one. Same operation as the Step button
Next Over
Executes the instructions in the program one by one (Next step execution). If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are not executed on a stepby-step basis. Same operation as the Over button
Start From Here
Executes the program from the cursor position on the Source window or the Assemble window .
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
85
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Come Here Go & Go
Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position in the Source window or the Assemble window. Continues executing the program. If a break occurs because a break condition is satisfied, the window is updated and the program is executed again. Same operation as clicking the Go each time a break has occurred.
Slowmotion
Continues step execution. Each time step execution has been performed, the window is updated and then step execution is performed again. Same operation as clicking the Step each time a break has occurred.
CPU Reset
Resets the CPU. Same operation as the Res button
Change PC Break Point Software Break Point Delete All Breakpoints Uncond. Trace ON
Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source window or the Assemble window to the PC. Sets or deletes a breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source window or the Assemble window. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position in the Source window or the Assemble window. Deletes all the set software break events. Validates unconditional trace so that trace can always be executed during program execution (default). (When IECUBE connected). At this time, the set trace event conditions are ignored. The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated. Validates conditional trace and traces in accordance with the trace event condition during program execution (when IECUBE connected ). The trace mode cannot be changed while the tracer is activated. Sets trace control mode. (when IECUBE connected) . Goes around the trace memory and overwrites data from the oldest frame (default). Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer. Goes around the trace memory and then stops the tracer and program execution Traces data by the number of delay count frames and stops the tracer when a delay trigger event has occurred. Traces data by the number of delay count frames and stops the tracer and program execution when a delay trigger event has occurred.
Cond. Trace ON
Tracer Control Mode Non Stop Full Stop Full Break Delay Trigger Stop Delay Trigger Break
Timer Start/Timer Stop
Starts timer measurement when it is stopped, or stops it when it is in progress (when IECUBE connected). This item is invalid if the program is not being executed and if a timer event is not used. Immediately after program execution has been started, timer measurement is in progress. Starts the tracer when it is stopped, or stops it when it is in progress (when IECUBE connected) . This item is invalid if the program is not being executed. Immediately after program execution has been started , the tracer is executed.
Tracer Start/Tracer Stop
86
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(6) [Event] menu Event Manager Manages various event conditions. Opens the Event Manager. Same operation as the Mgr button Software Break Manager Event... Manages software break event conditions. Opens the Software Break Manager. Registers an event condition. Opens the Event dialog box. Same operation as the Evn button Event Link... Break... Cannot be selected. Registers and sets a break event condition. Opens the Break dialog box. Same operation as the Brk button Trace... Registers and sets a trace event condition (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace dialog box. Same operation as the Trc button Snapshot... Stub... Timer... Cannot be selected. Cannot be selected. Registers and sets a timer event condition (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Timer dialog box. Same operation as the Tim button DMM... Delay Count... Cannot be selected. Sets a delay count (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Delay Count dialog box.
(7) [Browse] menu Source Text Displays a source text. Opens the Source window. If there is this window already open in the active status, it is opened in the static status. Same operation as the Src button Assemble Displays the disassemble results. Opens the Assemble window. If there is this window already open in the active status, it is opened in the static status. Same operation as the Asm button Memory Displays the contents of the memory. Opens the Memory window. If there is this window already open in the active status, it is opened in the static status. Same operation as the Mem button Watch Displays the watch contents. Opens the Watch window. Same operation as the Wch button Register Displays the register contents. Opens the Register window. Same operation as the Reg button
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
87
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
SFR
Displays the SFR. Opens the SFR window. Same operation as the SFR button
Local Variable
Displays the local variable. Opens the Local Variable window. Same operation as the Loc button
Stack Trace
Displays the stack trace results. Opens the Stack Trace window. Same operation as the Stk button
Trace
Displays the trace results (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace window. Same operation as the TrW button
Coverage Console Others (8) [Jump] menu Source Text
Cannot be selected. Opens the Console window. Displays other windows. Displays a user-defined window list.
Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value selected in the current window as the jump destination address. If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Cannot be selected.
Assemble
Memory
Coverage (9) [Window] menu New Window
Opens a new window displaying the same contents as those of the current window.This menu is valid only when the current window is the Source window, the Assemble window or the Memory window. Cascade display of the windows in the Main window. Tile display of the windows in the Main window. Rearranges the icons in the Main window. Closes all windows, except the Main window. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data.
Cascade Tile Arrange Icons Close All Refresh
88
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Active Static (Open Window)
Sets the window in the active status. Sets the window in the static status. Lists the windows that are open. The window with the check mark shown on the side of the figure is the current window. By selecting a window name, the selected window is used as the current window.
(10) [Help] menu ID78K0-QB Help Command Reference Main Window Help Current Window Help About... Displays the help of ID78K0-QB. Opens the Help window of COMMAND REFERENCE. Displays the help of the Main window. Displays the help of the current window. Displays the version of the ID78K0-QB. Opens the About dialog box.
Toolbar (1) Meaning of each button (2) Operation of Toolbar (1) Meaning of each button The meaning of each button on the toolbar is as follows. When the mouse cursor is placed on a button of the toolbar, a tool hint pops up several seconds later. Stops execution of the user program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Stop] . Resets the CPU and executes the user program. Same function as [Run] menu - > [Restart] . Executes the user program from the current PC without resetting the CPU. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Go] . Ignores break points being set, and executes the user program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Ignore break points and Go] . The user program is executed until execution returns Same function as [Run] menu -> [Return Out] . Note : This command is used for a function described in C language. Step execution (executes instructions in the program one by one.) If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are executed one by one. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Step In] . Next step execution (executes the program, assuming a function/call statement as one step.) If a function or subroutine is called, its instructions are not executed on a step-by-step basis. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Next Over] . Resets the CPU. Res Same function as [Run] menu -> [CPU Reset].
Stop
ReGo
Go
GoN
Ret
Step
Over
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
89
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opens the View File Load dialog box. Same function as [File] menu -> [Open...]. Open Opens the Download dialog box. Same function as [File] menu -> [Download...]. Load Opens the Project File Load dialog box. Same function as [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Open...]. Displays the source text. Opens the Source window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Source Text] . Displays the disassemble results. Opens the Assemble window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Assemble] . Displays the contents of the memory. Opens the Memory window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Memory] . Displays the watch contents. Opens the Watch window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Watch] . Displays the register contents. Opens the Register window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Register] . Displays the contents of SFR. Opens the SFR window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [SFR] . Displays the local variable contents. Opens the Local Variable window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Local Variable] . Displays the current stack contents. Opens the Stack Trace window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Stack Trace] . Displays the trace results (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace window. Same function as [Browse] menu -> [Trace] . Cannot be selected. Cov Mgr Evn Opens the Event Manager. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Event Manager...]. Registers and sets events. Opens the Event dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Event...]. Registers and sets break events. Opens the Break dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Break...]. Registers and sets a trace event. (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Trace dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Trace...]. Registers and sets a timer event. (when IECUBE connected) . Opens the Timer dialog box. Same function as [Event] menu -> [Timer...].
Proj Src
Asm Mem
Wch
Reg SFR
Loc Stk
TrW
Brk Trc
Tim
90
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Operation of Toolbar Whether the toolbar is displayed or not can be specified by selecting [Option] menu -> [Tool Bar]. This toolbar can be displayed in the following two modes. The modes are selected in the Debugger Option dialog box. Figure 6-2 Toolbar (Picture Only)
Figure 6-3 Toolbar (Picture and Text)
Window display area This area displays various debug windows. The displayed window can be changed in size or an icon can be created in this area.
Status bar The status bar displays the status of the ID78K0-QB and in-circuit emulator. While the user program is being executed, the status bar is displayed in red. Whether the status bar is displayed or not can be specified by selecting [Option] menu -> [Status Bar]. Figure 6-4 Status Bar
(1) Program name Source name Line number (2) Function name (3) PC value (4) CPU status (5) IE status (6) Break Cause (7) STEP mode
Displays the program file name indicated by the PC value. Displays the source file name indicated by the PC value. Displays the line number indicated by the PC value. Displays the function name indicated by the PC value. Displays the current PC value.
Refer to "Table 6-3 IE status". (If there are two or more the statuses, they delimited with '|' and displayed.)
Displays the step execution mode. Displays that the following modes are selected from the [Option] menu: SRC .............. Source mode INST ............. Instruction mode AUTO............ Automatic mode
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Refer to "Table 6-4
Refer to "Table 6-2
CPU status".
Break Cause".
91
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(8) Key input mode
Displays the key input mode. INS................ Insertion mode OVR .............. Overwrite mode The Memory window is fixed to OVR mode.
Display HALT STOP WAIT RESET POW OFF RESET by POW OFF Halt mode *1 Stop mode *1 Wait mode *1 Reset mode Power is not supplied to the target
Reset by turning off the power to the target.
Table 6-3 IE status Display RUN STEP TRC TIM BREAK Time
User program execution in progress (the color of the status bar changes). Step execution in progress. Tracer operating *1. Timer operating *1 Break occurring. Displays the result of measuring the time from the start of user program execution to the occurrence of break (Run-Break time) (refer to "Table 6-13 Measurable Values") *1 .
Table 6-4 Break Cause Display Manual Break Temporary Break Event Break Software Break Trace Full Break Trace Delay Break Forced break Temporary break Break by event *2 Software break *1 Break due to trace full *1 Break due to trace delay *1
Meaning
92
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 6-2
CPU status Meaning
Meaning
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Table 6-4 Break Cause Display Non Map Break Write Protect Read Protect SFR Illegal SFR Write Protect SFR Read Protect Stack Overflow Stack Underflow Uninitialize Stack Pointer Timer Over Break Fetch Break Unspecified Illegal IMS(IXS) Illegal Flash Macro Service Retry Over Flash Illegal Peripheral Break Break Event : "Event name" Before Execution :"Event name" Non-mapped area is accessed *1 . An attempt has been made to write to a write-protected area *1. Read was attempted from read protected area *1. SFR was illegally accessed *1. Read from prohibited SFR was attempted *1. Write to write-prohibited SFR was attempted *1. Break due to stack overflow *1 Break due to stack underflow *1 Break due to failure to perform stack pointer initialization Execution time-over detected *1 Guarded area or fetch prohibited area was fetched *1 Illegal action of user program related to peripheral chip function occurred. Refer to documentation on peripheral emulation board. Break due to illegal write to IMS, IXS register *1 Flash macro service in progress *2 RETRY count over break *1 Flash illegal break *1 Break from peripheral *1 Stopped due to event cause of displayed event name *1 . Before execution break triggered by event of displayed event name.*1
*1 *2
Only when IECUBE is connected. Only when MINICUBE is connected.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Meaning
93
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Configuration dialog box
This dialog box is used to display and set the ID78K0-QB operation environment. (Refer to "5. 1 Setting Debugging Environment".) This dialog box is automatically displayed after the ID78K0-QB is started up. However, no setting is required to read a project as the results of reading the project file are reflected in this dialog box. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)".) Figure 6-5 Configuration Dialog Box (When IECUBE connected)
94
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Figure 6-6 Configuration Dialog Box (When MINICUBE connected)
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening (Automatically when the ID78K0-QB is started up) Select [Option] -> [Configuration...] from the menu bar.
Explanation of each area (1) Chip (2) Internal ROM/RAM (3) Main Clock (4) Sub Clock (5) ID Code (6) Peripheral Break (7) Monitor Clock (8) Target (9) Target Power Off (10) Fail-safe Break (11) Mask (12) Memory Mapping
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
95
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Chip
This area is used to select the chip name. A chip name is selected from the drop-down list. On the drop-down list, only the chip names registered to the registry from the device file installer are displayed. This area can be specified only when the debugger is started up. Remark By default, the type selected at the previous startup is displayed, but if that type is not registered, the first type registered is displayed. (2) Internal ROM/RAM
This area is used to set the size of the internal RAM and internal ROM of the CPU. (Refer to "5. 1. 3 Mapping settings".) A mapping size is selected from the drop-down list. The default size is obtained from the device file through selection in (1) Chip , and displayed (value with '*'). Table 6-5 Range and Unit of Internal ROM/RAM Setting Area Internal ROM
Sets the Internal ROM size (When IECUBE connected) Displays the Internal ROM size (When MINICUBE connected)
Internal Bank ROM Internal high-speed RAM Internal Extend RAM
Sets the Internal bank ROM size Sets the Internal high-speed RAM size Sets the Internal Extend RAM size
Note
When set to other than 0, the internal bank ROM size is seen on the ID78K0-QB as shown in Figure
or higher cannot be made for other than bank areas.
96
6-7
(when IECUBE connected). The specification of addresses for the address space of 0x10000
Meaning
Settable range 0 - 60KB (4K-byte Unit) (Fixed to DF value) 0,20 - 224KB (4K-byte units) Note 64 - 1024 bytes (64-byte units) 0 - 14336 bytes (512-byte units) (Fixed value automatically mapped)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(With internal bank ROM size of 40 KB) As seen on debugger 0x2FFFF 0x2C000 0x2A000 0x28000 Bank 2 (8KB) Image
Image CPU address space 0x20000 Image 0x1C000 Bank 1 (16KB) 0x18000 Image 0x10000 Image 0x0C000 Bank 0 (16KB) 0x08000 Image 0x00000 0x0000 Bank Area 0x8000 0xC000 0xFFFF
(3) Main Clock
This area is used to select the main clock source input to the CPU. If a main clock board with an oscillator or resonator is connected, the setting is fixed to Clock Board. If not connected, the setting becomes External (target power supply (TVDD) detection result = ON) or System (target power supply (TVDD) detection result = OFF), and Clock Board cannot be selected. When MINICUBE is connected, this area is fixed to Clock Board and cannot be selected because the clock that is output from the clock socket or supervisor on the emulator is used as the main clock source. Clock Board External System Use the clock on the clock board as the main clock of the CPU. Use the main clock on the target board as the man clock of the CPU. Use the divided in-circuit emulator system clock as the main clock of the CPU. This value is selected from a drop-down list.
Figure 6-7
Diagram of Address Space When Internal ROM Bank Is Used
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
97
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Sub Clock
This area is used to select the sub clock source input to the CPU. If a sub clock board with a resonator is connected, the value is fixed to Clock Board. If not connected, the setting becomes External (target power supply (TVDD) detection result = ON) or System (target power supply (TVDD) detection result = OFF), and Clock Board cannot be selected. When is MINICUBE connected, cannot be selected. Clock Board External System Use the clock on the clock board as the sub clock of the CPU. Use the main clock on the target board as the sub clock of the CPU. Use the divided in-circuit emulator system clock as the sub clock of the CPU. This value is selected from a drop-down list.
(5) ID Code
This area is used to input the ID code to be used when the code on the internal ROM or internal flash memory is read by ID78K0-QB (ID code authentication) (when MINICUBE connected) . This area does not have to be set with a ROMless product or a product without a OCD (on-chip debug unit). Input a hexadecimal number of 20 digits (10 bytes) as the ID code (all 'F' by default). The ID code is saved to the registry. If inputting the ID code fails three times, the ID78K0-QB is forcibly terminated. For the details of ID code authentication, refer to "MINICUBE User's Manual". (6) Peripheral Break
This area is used to specify whether the peripheral emulation function of in-circuit emulator is stopped during a break. Break Non Break Stopped (default) Cannot be selected.
(7) Monitor Clock
This area is used to specify whether the operation clock of the monitor program is switched from the sub clock to the main clock during a break.
98
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
This area does not have to be set with a product without a sub clock. System The operation clock is switched to the main clock and the monitor program is executed (default). Caution In theID78K0-QB, the clock is changed by manipulating PCC, but not while the main clock is stopped. If the operation clock is switched to the main clock during a break, the clock is returned to the previous setting when execution returns to the user program. The monitor program is executed with the clock selected by the user program.
User (8) Target
This area is used to select whether the target board is to be connected to the in-circuit emulator or not(when IECUBE connected). Remark It is used to detect an illegal power supply status.
Message Output Pattern (When IECUBE Connected)" .) Connect Not Connect (9) Target Power Off be connected not be connected
This area is used to select whether the Power Off emulation function is valid or not (when MINICUBE is connected). Permit Not Permit (10) Fail-safe Break Power Off emulation function is valid. Power Off emulation function is invalid.
Clicking the button opens the Fail-safe Break dialog box, so that the fail-safe break function can be individually set.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
The default is determination by detecting the power (TVDD) of the target. (Refer to "Table 3-3
Error
99
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(11) Mask
This area is used to mask the signal sent from the target. The signal of a masked pin is not input to the in-circuit emulator and CPU. Mask a pin only when the operation of the target system is not stable at the debugging stage. Caution1 When MINICUBE is connected, only "TARGET RESET", and "INTERNAL RESET" can be specified. Caution2 When is IECUBE connected, and when "Not Connect" is specified in (8) Target , "WAIT" and "INTERNAL RESET" are fixed to the checked state, and the mask status cannot be changed. (12) Memory Mapping
This area is used to set mapping by specifying the memory attribute and address. (a) Memory Attribute The following mapping attributes can be selected. Select a mapping attribute according to the usage. (Refer to "5. 1. 3 Mapping settings".) Table 6-6 Mapping Attribute Target I/O ProtectNote1 Selects the target memory. Selects the I/O protect area. (This area can be set only in the area set as Target or External SFR area.) Selects the memory of the stack area (when IECUBE is connected) Type of Mapping Attribute Meaning
StackNote2
Note1
The area set as I/O Protect is not read unless it is registered to the SFR window or Watch window as an I/O port. To read this area, forcibly read it on these windows.
Note2
If the Stack area is not specified, the entire Internal high-speed RAM area (except for the register area) is specified as the Stack area by default.
100
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Mapping Address Specify the address to be mapped. Input the higher and lower addresses from the keyboard. (c) button, button
These buttons are used to set and delete mapping. When the button is clicked, the mapping specified with (a) Memory Attribute and (b) Mapping Address is set and displayed. Remark Moreover, mapping unit adjustment is performed except stack and I/O Protect, and if the mapping units is not matched, the minimum settable range including the specified address becomes the mapping target. Table 6-7 Mapping Area Target I/O Protect Stack Mapping Unit Mapping Unit 1-byte unit (Up to 4 locations settable) 1-byte unit
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Project... About... Help
Validates the current environment. Sets the environment and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous environment settings status before this dialog box was opened. Opens the Project File Load dialog box. If an error occurs while a project file is being opened or read, the ID78K0-QB can no longer continue and is terminated. Opens the About dialog box. Displays the help window of this window.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
101
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Extended Option dialog box
This dialog box is used to display and set the extended options of the ID78K0-QB. (Refer to "5. 1 Setting Debugging Environment".) Figure 6-8 Extended Option Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Option ] menu -> [Extended Option ...] .
Explanation of each area (1) Realtime Monitor (2) Flash Self Mode (3) On Mouse Click (4) Clear Register When Reset (5) Clear Trace Memory Before Run (6) Break Sound (7) Verify Check
102
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Realtime Monitor
Set the real-time monitor (when IECUBEconnected) (refer to "5. 12 The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). The function of the selected item is enabled. Realtime Readout Break When Readout (a) Redraw Interval Specify the sampling time (ms) of the RRM function (refer to "5. 12 The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). The sampling time can be specified in 100-ms units from 0 to 65500. If 0 is specified, or if this area is blank, the data is not displayed in real time. (2) Flash Self Mode Performs real-time monitoring in real time. Cannot be selected.
Cannot be selected. (3) On Mouse Click
This area is used to select whether a software breakpoint or hardware breakpoint is set as the default breakpoint if a breakpoint is set in the point mark area by clicking the mouse button in the Source window or the Assemble window (refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting"). Soft break Hard break Sets a software breakpoint (default). The mark of breakpoint is displayed in blue. Sets a hardware breakpoint. The mark of breakpoint is displayed in green (before execution)
(4) Clear Register When Reset
Select this checkbox to set the SP register to 0xfedf and all the banks of the general-purpose registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H) to 0x0 at CPU reset. Under the default setting, the registers are not cleared.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
103
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Clear Trace Memory Before Run
Select this checkbox to clear the trace memory prior to program execution (when IECUBE connected). (6) Break Sound
If the check box is checked, a beep sound is issued when a break occurs. (7) Verify Check
This area is used to specify whether a verify check is performed when data has been written to memory. A verify check is performed when download, memory fill, or memory copy is executed. A verify check is also performed when a variable or data is changed in the Watch window or the Memory window and is written to memory.
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened. Displays the help window of this window.
104
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Fail-safe Break dialog box
This dialog box is used to perform the fail-safe break settings. (Refer to "5. 1 Setting Debugging Environment".) When a project file is read, the results obtained by reading this project file are reflected in this dialog box. Remark For details on the fail-safe break function, refer to the user's manuals of the in-circuit emulator and the emulation board that are used. Figure 6-9 Fail-safe Break dialog box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Click the button in the Configuration dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
105
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Fail-safe break setting area When a checkbox is selected, the corresponding fail-safe break function is enabled. Under the default setting, all the checkboxes are selected. When MINICUBE is connected, items other than "Uninitialized Stack Pointer" are always disabled. Retry Over Fetch From Fetch Protect Area Read From Read Protect Area Write To Write Protect Area Access To None-existing SFR Read From Read Protect SFR Write To Write Protect SFR Too Big IMS/IXS/BANK Value Stack Overflow Stack Underflow Read from Uninitialized RAM Access To Non Mapped Area Uninitialized Stack Pointer Illegal Flash Self Programming Fail-safe From Peripheral Maximum allowable number of retries from peripheral exceeded Fetch of fetch prohibited area Read from read prohibited area Write to write prohibited area Access to non-existent SFR Read of read prohibited SFR Write to write prohibited SFR IMS/IXS/BANK setting error User stack limit exceeded (upper limit) User stack limit not reached (lower limit) Failure to perform RAM initialization Access to non-mapped area Failure to perform stack pointer initialization Cannot be selected. Fail-safe from peripheral
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
106
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Mask Option dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box is used to perform mask option and pin mode settings (refer to "5. 1 Setting Debugging Environment"). However, it is not necessary to perform such settings if reading a project file, and the results of reading a project file are reflected in this dialog box (refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)"). Remark For details about the mask options and pin modes, refer to the user's manuals for the in-circuit emulator and emulation board that are used. Figure 6-10 Mask Option dialog box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Option] menu -> [Mask Option...].
Explanation of each area (1) Pin group name : (2) Option name :
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
107
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Pin group name :
This area is used to select the pin group for which a mask option and pin mode are to be set. (2) Option name :
This area is used to set mask options and pin modes. The setting items differ depending on the pin group selected in (1) Pin group name :. The first item displayed as a setting item is the current setting.
Function buttons
OK Cancel Set Restore Help
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Validates the settings. Consecutive settings can be made (dialog box does not close). Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
108
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Debugger Option dialog box
This dialog box is used to display and set the various options of the ID78K0-QB. Figure 6-11 Debugger Option Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Option] menu -> [Debugger Option...].
Explanation of each area (1) Source Path (2) Default Extension (3) Open File History (4) Font (5) Project File (6) Tool Bar Pictures (7) Kanji (8) Tab Size (9) Startup Routine (10) DisAssemble (11) Watch Default
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
109
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Source Path
This area is used to specify the directory in which a source file or text file is searched. (a) Base : The directory is the basis of a relative path is displayed. The base directory is determined in the following sequence: 1) 2) 3) Directory to which the project file has been loaded Directory to which a load module or hex file has been loaded last Current directory of Windows
(b) Text box This area is used to specify the directory searched. To specify a directory, either directly input one to the text box, or click the button. A relative path can also be specified. Opens the Add Source Path Dialog Box by clicking the button. (semicolon) or "," (comma). Remark Immediately after this dialog box has been opened, the base directory is selected and opened. If the selected directory has already been set for the source path, a source path is not added. Figure 6-12 Add Source Path Dialog Box To delimit paths, use ";"
110
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Default Extension
This area is used to specify the default extension. Delimit extensions with " " (blank),";" (semicolon) or "," (comma). Source File Set the extension of a source file that is displayed when the Browse dialog box is opened by selecting [File] menu -> [Open...]. The default extension is " *.c, *.s , *.asm". Set the extension of a load module that is displayed when the Download dialog box is opened. The default extension is " *.lnk, *.lmf ".
Load Module
(3) Open File History
This area is used to set the number of histories of the open file displayed in the bottom field of the [File] menu. The default value is 4. If 0 is set, no history is displayed on the menu. (4) Font
This area is used to specify the font displayed on the Source window, Watch window, Quick Watch dialog box, Local Variable window, and the Stack Trace window. Clicking the button opens the Font dialog box in which the font to be displayed and its size can be set. (5) Project File This area is used to set automatic saving and loading of the project file. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)".)
(a) Auto Save Sets whether the project file is automatically saved at the ID78K0-QB termination. On Off Query Automatically saves the project file at the ID78K0-QB termination. Does not automatically save the project file at the ID78K0-QB termination. Displays the Exit Debugger dialog box at the ID78K0-QB termination (default).
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
111
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(b)Auto Load Sets whether the project file is automatically loaded at the ID78K0-QB start up. On Off Automatically loads the project file at the ID78K0-QB start up. Specify the project file to be loaded in (c) Load Project File. Does not automatically loads the project file at the ID850QB start up. (default) Load Project File
(c)
Specify the project file to be loaded automatically. Set a project file name by inputting from the keyboard or clicking the button. Clicking the button displays the Browse dialog box. (6) Tool Bar Pictures
This area sets the buttons to be displayed on the toolbar. (Refer to " Toolbar".) Pictures and Text Pictures only Displays a button on which a graphic and character are displayed. Displays a button with only graphic (default).
(7) Kanji Cannot be selected. (8) Tab Size
This area is used to set the tab size for each extension when files are displayed. (a) Extension Set an extension. Input an extension from the keyboard, or select one from the drop-down list. (b) Tab Size Select the tab size. Select how many spaces are displayed as a tab code (2, 4, or 8) . (c) Tab List
Displays the tab size set for each extension. (d) button To change the tab size setting, select (a) Extension and (b) Tab Size and click the button.
112
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(e) button To delete the tab size setting, select the setting to be deleted from Tab List and click button. (9) Startup Routine
This area is used to specify the first address , end address, and display start symbol of the text area (code area) of the start-up routine by symbols. The source file can be opened if an object file in the load module format is downloaded in the Download dialog box. Begin label End label main() label Specifies the symbol of the first address (default : _@cstart) Specifies the symbol of the end address (default : _@cend) Specifies the display start symbol (default _main)
Caution1 If the specified symbol is not correct, the source file cannot be opened until the PC reaches the address range of the corresponding source file. In addition, the start-up routine cannot be skipped by step execution. Caution2 Be sure to specify this area. If this area is blank, the dialog box cannot be closed. (10) DisAssemble
This area is used to set for disassemble display. (a) Show Offset Specifies whether an offset (symbol + offset) is displayed during disassemble display. When the offset is not displayed, only a symbol that matches a numeric value is displayed, if any. If no matching symbol is found, the numeric value is displayed as a hexadecimal number unchanged. Label Mnemonic Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Label field. In the default condition, the offset is not displayed. Specifies whether the offset is displayed in the Mnemonic field. In the default condition, the offset is displayed.
(b) Register Name This area is used to select the method of displaying register names in mnemonics during disassemble display.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
113
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function Name Absolute Name
Displays register names as function names or nicknames (default). Displays register names as absolute names.
(11) Watch Default
This area is used to specify a symbol to be watched in the Watch window etc. . (a) Size Sets the default display size of data if [Adaptive] is specified. Byte Word Double Word
8-bit display(default) 16-bit display(default) 32-bit display(default)
(b) Radix Sets the default radix in which data is to be displayed if [Proper] is specified. Hex Dec Oct Bin String Displays data in hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays data in decimal numbers. Displays data in octal numbers. Displays data in binary numbers. Displays data in character strings.
(c)
Show Variable Type
Select the display/non-display of variable type is specified. On Off Displays the type of a variable. Does not display the type of a variable (default).
(d) Language Select the display/non-display of type of variable is specified. C ASM Displays a C-like base number (default). Displays an assembly language-like base number.
114
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changings and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous settings before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
115
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Project File Save dialog box
This dialog box is used to save the current debugging environment to a project file. Debugging environment (project file)".) Project files can be newly saved or saved as in this dialog box. Figure 6-13 Project File Save Dialog Box (Refer to "5. 13. 1
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Save As...]. (To save a file of same name as a project file previously loaded or saved, select [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Save].)
116
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Save in:, File name: (2) Save as type: (1) Save in:, File name: This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list at the upper part of this area. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Save as type: This area is used to specify the extension (*.prj) of the project file to be saved. If the extension is omitted, "*.prj" is appended as the default extension.
Function buttons
Save Cancel Help
Saves the debugging environment to the selected file. After saving, the dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without saving the file. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
117
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Project File Load dialog box
This dialog box is used to restore the debugging environment to the debugging environment saved to the project file. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)") If there is an active Source window after a project file has been loaded, it is displayed at the top. Caution If, following ID78K0-QB startup, a project file with settings that differ from those of the target device at startup has been loaded, the target device specified at startup is used. Figure 6-14 Project File Load Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Click the Proj button, select [File] menu -> [Project] -> [Open...].
118
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type : (1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type : This area is used to specify the extension (*.prj) of the file to be loaded.
Function buttons
Open Cancel Help
Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
119
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Download dialog box
This dialog box is used to select the name and format of a file to be downloaded, and downloads memory contents to the in-circuit emulator and the target system. (Refer to "5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function"). If a load module file has been downloaded, the corresponding source file is searched, and the Source window is automatically opened.
Caution
If a file other than a load module file is loaded, source debugging cannot be executed. Figure 6-15 Download Dialog Box
Remark
The following dialog box appears while downloading and the downloading can be can celled at any time. This dialog box is closed automatically after completing downloading. Figure 6-16 The Progress of Download
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
120
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening Click the Load button, or select [File] menu -> [Download...].
Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name: (2) Files of type: (3) Load (4) Reset (5) Offset Address (1) Look In:, File name: This area is used to specify a file name. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list at the upper part of this area. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type:
That Can Be Downloaded".) Remark These are default extensions; other extensions can also be used.
The default extension of the displayed load module can also be specified in the Debugger Option dialog box. (3) Load
This area is used to set a load condition. This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified. This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified. Symbol Specifies whether symbol information is read (when checked, default) or not. The memory capacity can be saved by not reading symbol information when a program consisting of two or more load module files is to be debugged and if the symbol information of some modules does not have to be read. Specifies whether object information is read (when checked, default) or not. (The object information is read even if this button is not checked when a HEX file is loaded.) Specifies whether the contents of the internal flash memory are erased all before download (when checked, default) or not . (when MINICUBE connected)
Object Erase
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be downloaded. (Refer to "Table 5-3
Type of File
121
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Reset
This area is used to set a reset condition. This setting is valid only if a file in the load module format is specified. Symbol Specifies whether symbol information is reset (when checked, default) or not. Caution When debugging a program consisting of two or more load module files, load each one of the load module files without resetting the symbol information. When downloading two or more load module files, take care that location addresses do not overlap. Specifies whether the CPU is reset or not (not checked, default).
CPU (5) Offset Address
This area is used to specify the offset address that is used when a file is loaded (for binary data, specify the start
Symbols"".). The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
Open Cancel Help Restore
Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without loading the file. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the input data to the original status.
122
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
address).
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Upload dialog box
This dialog box is used to set the name and format of the file to be saved, and save the set memory contents, etc., to that file. (Refer to "5. 2 Download Function / Upload Function") Figure 6-17 Upload Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [File] menu -> [Upload...].
Explanation of each area (1) Save in :, File name : (2) Save as Type : (3) Save Address
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
123
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Save in :, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be saved. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Save as Type : This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be saved.
Be Downloaded")
However, if "All (*.*) " is selected, the data is saved in the default Intel extended Hex format. Remark Extensions other than those listed can also be used. (3) Save Address
This area is used to specify the range of address to be saved.
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Function buttons
Save Cancel Help Restore
Saves the file according to the setting. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened.
124
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols")
The format of the data to be saved is determined by the extension. (Refer to "Table 5-3
Type of File That Can
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source window
This dialog box is used to displays source files or text files. (Refer to "5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function".) In addition to Breakpoint setting and Mixed display mode (Source window), a number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Moreover, there are two statuses, Active status and static status, for this window. When the window is in the
active status, it has Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected). Moreover, the items selected in the window with Drag & drop function can be used in another window. (Refer to "5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows".) Caution
If program codes is described in an include file and these codes are included in multiple files, the line
numbers and addresses do not correspond on a one-to-one bases. In such an include file, function that indicates the correspondence relationship between line numbers and addresses dose not correctly operate. Figure 6-18 Source window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Source window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons
Opening Click the Src button, select [Browse]menu -> [Source Text]. (This window is automatically opened if the corresponding source file exists after the download module file has been downloaded. )
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
125
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Point mark area (2) Current PC mark area (3) Line number/address display area (4) Source text display area (1) Point mark area
This area is used for Event Setting Status (Event Mark), program code display, and Breakpoint setting. Caution The program code is displayed only when the symbol information downloaded by the load module is read. Breakpoints can be set or deleted by clicking with the mouse on this program code. (if "*" is
not displayed for the line, the breakpoint is set on the line above or below the line, whichever has "*" displayed). If an event has been set for the corresponding line, one of the marks listed in the following table is displayed. The color of the "B" mark differs according to the breakpoint type and status. (When a breakpoint is set in this area, it is enabled at the same time that it is set.) Table 6-8 Mark B (blue) B (red) B (green) B (black) Software breakpoint is set. Valid hardware breakpoint (after execution) is set. Valid hardware breakpoint (before execution) is set. Note: Breaks before execution are set with priority. Invalid hardware breakpoint is set. This hardware breakpoint can be validated on the Event Manager or in the Break dialog box. Event condition is set. Trace event is set.(IECUBE) Timer event is set. (IECUBE) Multiple events are set. Event Setting Status (Event Mark) Meaning
E T Ti A
Remark
If an address range is specified as the address condition of the event, the lower addresses of the range are displayed. The mask specification of the address condition is not reflected.
126
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Current PC mark area
The mark '>', which indicates the current PC value (PC register value), is displayed in this area. Clicking this mark with the mouse displays a pop-up window that shows the PC register value. By double-clicking the current PC mark area, the program can be executed up to a specified line. (3) Line number/address display area
This area displays the line numbers of a source file or text file. Red indicates line numbers for which corresponding program code exists, and black indicates line numbers for which corresponding program code does not exist. In the Mixed display mode (Source window), disassemble display addresses are displayed in gray. (4) Source text display area
This area displays source files and text files. Yellow indicates the current PC line, and red indicates lines where a valid breakpoint is set. In the Mixed display mode (Source window), source lines are displayed in the regular color. Moreover, this area also provides the following functions for lines (start address of program code) and addresses where the cursor has been placed.
- Drag & drop function - Context menu
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
- [Come Here] , [Start From Here] (Refer to "Table 5-9
Type of Execution")
127
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Caution
If a Program code does not exist on the source line, the top address of the line above or below the line on which a program code exists is manipulated by these functions. . These functions cannot be performed in the following cases. The corresponding menu will be dimmed and cannot be selected. - If a file other than a source file is displayed - While the user program is being executed
[View] menu (Source window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu, when the Source window is active. Create Break Event Break when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable Break when Read from this Variable Clear Event? Mix Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read/ write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected variable. Displays the event information of a line at the cursor position or a selected variable name. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Turns on/off Mixed display mode (Source window).
Context menu
Move... Mix Add Watch... Symbol...
Moves the display position. Opens the Source Text move dialog box. Turns on/off Mixed display mode (Source window). Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read/ write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for write. Sets a break event that occurs if the selected variable is accessed for read. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected variable. Displays the event information of a line at the cursor position or a selected variable name. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened.
Break when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable Break when Read from this Variable Clear Event?
128
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Come Here Change PC Break Point Software Break Point Assemble
Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position. (Refer to "Table 5-7 Break Types".) Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC. Sets or deletes a hardware breakpoint at the cursor position. Remark: Breaks before execution (B) are set with priority. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position. Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Cannot be selected.
Memory
Coverage
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Source Search dialog box and searches a character string of the source text. If a character string is selected in the source text display area, the Source Search dialog box is opened to search the character string. If no character string is selected, the Source Search dialog box is opened with nothing specified to be searched. Specify a search method in the Source Search dialog box. The result of search is highlighted in the Source window. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [Search...]. Searches forward (upward on screen) for the text that satisfies the search condition set in the Source Search dialog box, starting from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the button during a search. Searches backward (downward on screen) for the text that satisfies the search condition set in the Source Search dialog box, starting from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the button during a search. Stops searching. Adds the variables selected in the source text display area to the Watch window. If the Watch window is not opened, it is opened. If no text is selected in the source text display area, the Watch window is only opened. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [View Watch]. Temporarily displays the contents, such as a variable, selected in the source text display area in the Quick Watch dialog box. If no text is selected in the source text display area, the Quick Watch dialog box is only opened. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [Quick Watch...]. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window.
<<
>>
Stop(during a search) Watch
Quick...
Refresh Close
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
129
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search the contents of a file in the Source window. (Refer to "5. 3. 1 Source display") By setting each item and then clicking the button, searching can be started. By clicking the button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Source window can be used for the search. Figure 6-19 Source Search Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Source window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the button in the same window.
Explanation of each area (1) Find What (2) Match Case (3) Direction
130
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Find What
This area is used to specify the data to be searched. (Up to 256 character.) In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. (2) Match Case
This should be checked to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. (3) Direction
This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search. Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor (default).
Function buttons
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Stops searching. Closes this dialog box. (During searching, this button is replaced by the button.) Displays this dialog box online help files.
Set Find Stop (during searching) Cancel Help
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
131
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Source Text move dialog box
This dialog box is used to specify a file to be displayed in the Source window and the position from which displaying the file is to be started. (Refer to "5. 3. 1 Source display".) Figure 6-20 Source Text Move Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Source window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Move...].
Explanation of each area (1) Option (2) To: (1) Option
This area is used to select the input mode when the display start position is specified. (a) Address/Symbol This should be selected to specify by an address (or symbol). (b) Line/File This should be selected to specify by by a line number (or file name). To search the file name, use the button.
132
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) To:
This area is used to specify the file name or address to be displayed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. - When the (a) Address/Symbol is selected Specifies the address from which display is to be started. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol
Clicking the button displays the source text so that the source line corresponding to the specified address value can be viewed. - When the (b) Line/File is selected Specifies the line number (or a file name) from which display is to be started. Specification of the line number is done with [[path name] file name]# line number. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. File name specification can be done just with the file name, or using the absolute path and relative path. If just the file name or the relative path was specified, the file in the source path specified in the Debugger Option dialog box is searched. The file whose specified line number was specified as the first line is displayed by clicking the button. When the file name is omitted, the currently displayed file is displayed from the specified line. If the line number is omitted, display is done from the first line of the file.
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
Starts displaying the source text from the specified position. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
or a expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
133
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Assemble window
This window is used to disassemble and display programs. It is also used to execute Online assembly. (Refer to "5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function".) The results of online assembly are also reflected in the Memory window. In addition to Breakpoint setting , a number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Moreover, there are two statuses, Active status and static status, for this window. When the window is in the active status, it has a Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected). Moreover, the items selected in the window with the Drag & drop function can be used in another window. (Refer to "5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows".) Figure 6-21 Assemble window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Assemble window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons - Related operations
Opening Click the Asm button, select [Browse] menu -> [Assemble] .
134
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Point mark area (2) Current PC mark area (3) Address specification area (4) Disassemble display area (1) Point mark area
This area is used for Event Setting Status (Event Mark) and Breakpoint setting. (2) Current PC mark area
The mark '>', which indicates the current PC value (PC register value), is displayed in this area. By double-clicking the current PC mark area, the program can be executed up to a specified line. (3) Address specification area
This area displays the disassembly start address. Caution The end address is not display. The end address is 0xFFFF, if the memory bank function is not used.
(4) Disassemble display area
This area displays the labels and code data of addresses, and disassembled mnemonics. This area displays source files and text files. Yellow indicates the current PC line, and red indicates lines where a valid breakpoint is set. It can be Online assembly in the mnemonic field. This area also provides the following functions:
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
135
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
- Drag & drop function - Context menu
[View] menu (Assemble window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu, when the Assemble window is active. Event? Displays the event information of the address at the cursor position. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened.
Context menu
Move... Add Watch... Symbol...
Moves the display position. Opens the Address move dialog box. Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. Opens the Symbol To Address dialog box. Executes the program from the current PC to the cursor position. (Refer to "Table 5-7 Break Types".) Sets the address at the cursor position to the PC. Sets or deletes a hardware breakpoint at the cursor position. Remark : Breaks before execution (B) are set with priority. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint at the cursor position. Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Cannot be selected.
Come Here Change PC Break Point Software Break Point Source Text
Memory
Coverage
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Assemble Search dialog box and searches for a character string of mnemonics. Specify a search method in the Assemble Search dialog box. The result of search is highlighted in the Assemble window. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [Search...].
136
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
- [Come Here] , [Start From Here] (Refer to "Table 5-9
Type of Execution")
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
<<
Searches forward (upward on screen) for the contents that satisfy the search condition set in the Assemble Search dialog box, starting from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the button during a search. Searches backward (downward on screen) for the contents that satisfy the search condition set in the Assemble Search dialog box, starting from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the button during a search. Stops searching. Adds the symbols selected in (4) Disassemble display area to the Watch window. If the Watch window is not opened, it is opened. If no text is selected in (4) Disassemble display area, the Watch window is only opened. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [View Watch]. Temporarily displays the contents, such as symbols, selected in (4) Disassemble display area on the Quick Watch dialog box. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box. If no text is selected in the disassemble display area, the Quick Watch dialog box is only opened. This is the same operation as selecting [View] menu -> [Quick Watch...]. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window.
>>
Stop(during a search) Watch
Quick...
Refresh Close
Related operations
(1) Online assembly To change the disassembled contents, move the cursor to the mnemonic field (the overwrite and insertion modes are alternately selected by pressing the Insert key). If an attempt is made to move the cursor to another line after the disassembled contents have been changed in the mnemonic field, the new contents are checked. If the new contents are illegal, the code data on the line where the contents have been changed is indicated as '*'. The contents changed in the mnemonic field are written into the memory by pressing the Enter key. By pressing the Enter key, the new contents are checked. If even one line is illegal, the new contents are not written into the memory. To discard the contents, press the ESC key. If the contents are correct and if the Enter key is pressed, the contents are written to the memory, and then the cursor moves to the next line in the mnemonic field, so that the data on the next line can be changed. Caution If the number of new instruction bytes is less than the number of previous instruction bytes as a result of changing, as many 'NOP' instructions as necessary are inserted. If the number of new instruction bytes is more than the number of previous instruction bytes, the next instruction is overwritten. In this case also, as many 'NOP' instructions as necessary are inserted. The same applies to instructions that straddle over source lines.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
137
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Assemble Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search the contents in the Assemble window . (Refer to "5. 3. 2 Disassemble display".) Successive character strings included in an input character string and disassembler character string are compared as one blank character. By setting each item and then clicking the button, searching can be started. By clicking the button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Assemble window can be used for the search. Figure 6-22 Assemble Search Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Assemble window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the button in the same window.
Explanation of each area (1) Find What (2) Match Case (3) Scan Whole Region (4) Direction (5) Address (1) Find What
This area is used to specify the data to be searched (up to 256 character). In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed.Up to 16 input histories can be recorded.
138
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Match Case
This should be checked to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. (3) Scan Whole Region
This should be checked to search the entire specified range. (4) Direction
This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search. Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor (default).
(5) Address
This area is used to specify the address to be searched. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or
Function buttons
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Stops searching. Closes this dialog box.(During searching, this button is replaced by the button.) Displays this dialog box online help files.
Set Find Stop (searching) Cancel Help
expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
139
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Address move dialog box
This dialog box is used to specify the start address from which displaying, as follows. - Memory window - Assemble window - SFR window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the target window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Move...].
Explanation of each area (1) To
This area is used to specify an address. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box, or the current PC value etc. is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
The corresponding window is displayed from the address. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
140
expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Figure 6-23
Address Move Dialog Box (Example: When Memory Window Is Open)
Specifying Symbols".) Up to 16 input histories can be recorded.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Symbol To Address dialog box
This dialog box is used to display the address of the specified variable or function, or the value of the specified symbol. (Refer to "5. 3 Source Display, Disassemble Display Function".) Figure 6-24 Symbol To Address Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [View] menu -> [Symbol...].
Explanation of each area (1) Symbol (2) Conversion result display area (3) Radix (1) Symbol
This area is used to specify the variable, function name, symbol name, or line number to be converted. (Refer to
The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. To change the contents of this area, click the button. The conversion result will be displayed in (2) Conversion result display area.
"Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
141
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2)
Conversion result display area
If bit symbol have been specified, they are converted to the Address.bit format. Also, equations that include bit symbols cannot be specified. The variable, address of the function, value of the symbol, address of the line number, or value of the expression specified in (1) Symbol is displayed. The address value of an I/O port name or SFR name, the register contents of a register name, or flag value of a PSW flag name is displayed. (3) Radix
This area is used to select the radix of the data to be displayed in (2) Conversion result display area. Hex Dec Oct Bin Hexadecimal number (default) Decimal number Octal number Binary number
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore
If the contents of (1) Symbol have been changed, converts the symbol. After conversion, closes the dialog box if the contents of (1) Symbol have not been changed. Closes this dialog box. Restores the input data to the original status. If the button has already been clicked, the data is restored to the status immediately after the button was clicked. Displays this dialog box online help files.
Help
142
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Watch window
This window is used to display and change specified watch data. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) This window can also display wide-ranging watch data (such as global variables and public symbols) in real time even during program execution, in the same way as the Memory window. The result of updating and rewriting data in this window will be reflected in the Memory window. Watch data registration is done by pressing the button in the Source window or the Assemble window. (Refer to "5. 6. 3 Registering and deleting watch data".) This window allows easy setting of breakpoints to variables with a Context menu. Caution If a local variable and a global variable exist with the same name, the local variable takes priority. Figure 6-25 Watch Window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Watch window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons
Opening Click the Wch button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Watch].
Explanation of each area (1) Left field (symbol name display area) (2) Right field (data value display/setting area)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
143
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Left field (symbol name display area)
This area is used to display variable names, symbol names and types, and tag names of structures or unions. '+' is prefixed to the displayed arrays, pointer variables, and structures or unions. These variables are expanded and displayed as follows when they are double-clicked: Table 6-9 First character + Watch Window Display Format (Symbol)
Array, pointer variable, or structure/union Expanded display is performed by double-clicking "+" (first character changes from "+" to "-"). Array Pointer variable Structure/union By double-clicking the '+', all the elements of the variable are displayed in accordance with the type of the array variable. By double-clicking the '+', the data indicated by the pointer is displayed. By double-clicking the '+', all the members of the structure/union are displayed in accordance with the type of the member variable. If a structure or union is defined in the structure or union, the structure name or union name of the internal structure or union is also displayed. The internal structure or union can be also expanded by using '+'.
-
Expanded display variable Expanded display is canceled by double-clicking "-" (first character changes from "-" to "+").
Remark
If an array has too many variables and takes too long to expand, a warning message is displayed.
Registered watch data changes are performed in the Change Watch dialog box opened by selecting the item to be changed and then selecting Context menu -> [Change Watch...]. A line with an expanded hierarchy, such as the elements of an array, and members of structures and unions cannot be deleted. If an access breakpoint is set for a variable or a symbol in the Watch window, the symbol name display area is highlighted in gold.
144
Meaning
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)
This area is used to display and change watch data values. A value is updated when execution is stopped. To save a value, select [File ] menu -> [Save As...]. This area is blank if getting data has failed. Values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. The display format is as follows: Table 6-10 Display Data Integer Hexadecimal (0xxxxx) or (xxxxH) Decimal (xxxx) or (xxxxT) Octal (0xxxx\) or (xxxxQ) Binary (0bxxxx) or (xxxxY) "Character" Member name Displayed in accordance with specified scope. Single precision/double precision supported The input/display format is as follows: [ + | - ] inf [ + | - ] nan [ + | - ] integer e [ + | - ]exponent [ + | - ] integer.fraction[ e [ + | - ]exponent Data that has been invalidated because of a change in the scope or optimized compiling Watch Window Display Format (Data) Contents
Character Enumeration type If scope is specified Floating-point type
'?'
Remark
The radix of a data value can be changed on the Context menu for each variable. The display format of "integer" can be changed on the Debugger Option dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
145
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
[View] menu (Watch window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Create Break Event Beak when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable Break when Read from this Variable Clear Event? Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Creates a break event by using the selected item as follows. Creates a break event that can be accessed for read/write. Creates a break event that can be accessed for write. Creates a break event that can be accessed for read. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected item. Displays the event information of the variable selected. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays character strings. Displays the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default). Displays in 8-bit units. Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units. Displays the default value of each variable (default). Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language. Symbols in assembly language are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box . Moves up one line. Moves down one line. Forcibly reads SFR that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports and I/O protect area added in the Add I/ O Port dialog box.
Byte Word Double Word Adaptive
Up Down Compulsion Read
Context menu
Beak when Access to this Variable Break when Write to this Variable
Creates a break event that can be accessed for read/write by using the selected item. Creates a break event that can be accessed for write by using the selected item.
146
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Break when Read from this Variable Clear Event? Change Watch... Delete Watch Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper
Creates a break event that can be accessed for read by using the selected item. Deletes a break event corresponding to the selected item. Displays the event information of the variable selected. If an event is set, the Event dialog box is opened. Changes the selected watch data. Opens the Change Watch dialog box. Deletes the selected watch data from the window. Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers. Displays the selected line as a character string. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default). Displays the selected line in 8-bit units. Displays the selected line in 16-bit units. Displays the selected line in 32-bit units. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable (default). Only this item is valid for a symbol in C language. Symbols in assembly language are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box . Moves the selected line one line up. Moves the selected line one line down.
Byte Word Double Word Adaptive
Up Down
Function buttons
Add...
Opens the Add Watch dialog box. If watch data is specified and the button is clicked in the Add Watch dialog box, the specified watch data is added to the Watch window. Deletes the selected watch data from the window. Moves the selected line one line up. Moves the selected line one line down. Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data. Closes this window.
Delete Up Down Refresh Close
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
147
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Quick Watch dialog box
This dialog box is used to temporarily display or change specified watch data. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) Figure 6-26 Quick Watch Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Source window or Assemble window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Quick Watch...], or click the button in same window.
Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Symbol name display area (3) Data value display/setting area (4) Display radix selection area (upper left field) (5) Display size selection area (second upper left field) (6) Number
148
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Name
This area is used to specify the watch data to be displayed. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. If the contents of this area have been changed, the data specified can be displayed in the field below by clicking the button. (2) Symbol name display area
This area is used to display watch data (variable names, symbol names and types, and tag names of structures or unions). (Refer to "(1) Left field (symbol name display area)" in the Watch window.) This area cannot be edited. (3) Data value display/setting area
This area is used to display and change data values . (Refer to "(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)" in the Watch window.) (4) Display radix selection area (upper left field)
This area is used to select the display radix. Proper Hex Dec Oct Bin String Variable : Displays the default value of each variable. Symbol : Displays data with the radix set in the Debugger Option dialog box. Displays in hexadecimal numbers. Displays in decimal numbers. Displays in octal numbers. Displays in binary numbers. Displays as a character string.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
149
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Display size selection area (second upper left field)
This area is used to select the display size. If the display size is fixed, such as when a variable in C language or register is to be displayed, it cannot be changed. Adaptive Byte Word Double Word Variable : Displays the default value of each variable. Symbol : Displays data with the size set in the Debugger Option dialog box. Displays in 8-bit units. Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units.
(6) Number
This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed (blank or a number of 1 to 256). If this area is blank, data is displayed as a simple variable. If a number of 1 or more is specified, data is displayed as an array variable in the Watch window. If an array variable is displayed, '+' is prefixed to the data. By double-clicking this '+', all the elements of the data are expanded and displayed in accordance with the type of the data ('-' is prefixed to the expanded data. If this '-' is double-clicked, the expanded display is canceled). If the number of data to be displayed is fixed, such as when a variable in C language or register is to be displayed, the specified number of data is invalid.
Function buttons
View Add Close
Displays the data specified in (1) Name in the field below. Adds the data specified in (1) Name to the Watch window. Closes this dialog box. Data that has not actually been written to the target memory will be canceled.
150
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Add Watch dialog box
This dialog box is used to register watch data to be displayed in the Watch window. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) Multiple data with the same symbol name can be registered. Figure 6-27 Add Watch Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [View] menu -> [Add Watch...], or click the button in the Watch window.
Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Radix (3) Size (4) Number (1) Name
This area is used to specify symbol to be added to the Watch window. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. This area is blank if no character string is selected. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
151
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
The input format is as follows: Table 6-11 - Variable Name of C language Variable expression : Variable Name |Variable expression [Constant value | Variable Name] |Variable expression . Member name |Variable expression -> Member name |*Variable expression |&Variable expression - Register name - SFR name, SFR bit name - Label, EQU and address of immediate value - Register name.bit - SFR name. bit - Label name.bit , EQU symbol.bit, address of immediate value.bit - Bit symbol - Specification of scope Elements of array Entity members of structure/ union Members of structure/union indicated by pointer Value of pointer variable Address where variable is located Watch Window Input Format
How a variable is handled when a scope Is specified is as follows: Table 6-12 Scope Specification prog$file#func#var prog$file#var prog$func#var prog$var file#func#var file#var func#var var How a Variable Is Handled When a Scope Is Specified File name file file global global file file current current Function name func global func global func global func current Variable Name var var var var var var var var
Program name prog prog prog prog current current current current
152
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Radix
This area is used to select the display radix. (Refer to "(4) Display radix selection area (upper left field)" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (3) Size
This area is used to select the display size. (Refer to "(5) Display size selection area (second upper left field)" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (4) Number
This area is used to specify the number of data to be displayed. (Refer to "(6) Number" in the Quick Watch dialog box.)
Function buttons
Add OK Cancel Restore Help
Adds the specified data to the Watch window. The dialog box remains open. Adds the specified data to the Watch window. Closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
153
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Change Watch dialog box
This window is used to change the data on a line selected in the Watch window. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) A line with an open hierarchy, such as the elements of an array, and members of structures and unions cannot be changed. When watch data is changed, the contents of the selected line are replaced with the new data. The symbol name can be changed even if it results in duplication of a name already in use with existing data. Figure 6-28 Change Watch Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening
When the Watch window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Change Watch...].
Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Radix (3) Size (4) Number
154
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Name
This area is used to change a symbol name on a line selected in the Watch window. (Refer to "(1) Name" in the Add Watch dialog box.) (2) Radix
This area is used to change the display radix on a line selected in the Watch window . (Refer to "(4) Display radix selection area (upper left field)" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (3) Size
This area is used to change the display size on a line selected in the Watch window. (Refer to "(5) Display size selection area (second upper left field)" in the Quick Watch dialog box.) (4) Number
This area is used to change the number of data to be displayed on a line selected in the Watch window. (Refer to "(6) Number" in the Quick Watch dialog box.)
Function buttons Add OK Cancel Restore Help Cannot be selected. Replaces the data on a line selected in the Watch window with the specified data, and then closes this dialog box. Closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
155
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Local Variable window
This window is used to display the local variable in the current function and change the local variable values. (Refer to "5. 6 Watch Function".) It is linked with the Jump function of the Stack Trace window, and displays the local variable in the function jumped when jumping to the Source window. A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Figure 6-29 Local Variable Window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Context menu - Function buttons
Opening Click the Loc button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Local Variable].
Explanation of each area (1) Left field (local variable name display area) (2) Right field (local variable value display/setting area)
156
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1)
Left field (local variable name display area)
This area displays local variable name. (Refer to "(1) Left field (symbol name display area)" in the Watch window.) Auto, Internal Static, and Register variables can be displayed. This area cannot be edited. (2) Right field (local variable value display/setting area)
This area is used to display and change local variable values. (Refer to "(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)" in the Watch window.)
[View] menu (Local variable window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays character strings. Displays the default value of each variable (default).
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
157
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Context menu
Add Watch... Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper
Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers. Displays the selected line as a character string. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default).
Function buttons
Refresh Close
Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data. Closes this window.
158
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Stack Trace window
This window is used to display or change the current stack contents of the user program. (Refer to "5. 6. 7 Stack trace display function".) The window corresponding to the stack contents can be jumped to with the Jump function. A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Caution 1 The stack trace display function may not operate properly when there is a function (noauto, norec, etc.) that does not push the frame pointer (HL) onto the stack, or when the -qf option is provided as an optimization option during compiling. Caution2 [ERROR] may be displayed during prologue or epilogue processing of a function. Figure 6-30 Stack Trace Window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (Stack Trace window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons
Opening Click the Stk button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Stack Trace].
Explanation of each area (1) Left field (stack frame number display area) (2) Center field (stack frame contents display area) (3) Right field (stack contents display/setting area)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
159
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Left field (stack frame number display area)
This area assigns numbers to and displays the stack contents. A stack frame number is a natural number starting from 1. The shallower the nesting of the stack, the higher the number. This means that a function having stack number one higher than that of a certain function is the function that calls the certain function. (2) Center field (stack frame contents display area)
This area displays the stack frame contents. It displays function names or local variable names. Note, however, that this area cannot be edited. (a) If the stack contents consist of a function They are displayed as follows: [program name$file name#function name (argument list) #line number] If this line is double-clicked, the operation will be the same as jumping to the Source window of the Jump function (i.e., the local variable in the function to which execution has jumped will be displayed in the Local Variable window).If the function has a local variable, the local variable will be displayed on the next and subsequent lines. (b) If the stack contents consist of a local variable
Note that the internal Static and Register variables are not displayed. (3) Right field (stack contents display/setting area)
This area is used to display or change the stack contents.
160
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Its type and name are displayed. (Refer to "Table 6-9
Watch Window Display Format (Symbol)".)
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) If the stack contents are a function '--' is displayed and the function cannot be changed. (b) If the stack contents are a local variable The variable value is displayed. (Refer to "(2) Right field (data value display/setting area)" in the Watch window.)
[View] menu (Stack Trace window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays character strings. Displays the default value of each variable (default).
Context menu
Bin Oct Dec Hex String Proper
Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers. Displays the selected line as a character string. Displays the selected line as the default value of each variable . Symbols are displayed in accordance with the setting of the Debugger Option dialog box (default). Displays the corresponding source text and source line from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated).
Source Text
Assemble
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
161
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory
Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Cannot be selected.
coverage
Function buttons
Refresh Shrink <<< Expand >>> (when the button is clicked) Close
Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data. Collapses the local variable list of the selected function. Displays the local variable list of the selected function.
Closes this window.
162
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory window
This window is used to display and change the memory contents. (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) The memory access status (read, write, read & write) can be displayed using different colors (refer to "5. 7. 3 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected)"). Other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Moreover, there are two statuses, Active status and static status, for this window. When the window is in the
active status, it has Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected), Jump function . (Refer to "5. 14 Functions Common to Various Windows".) Remark The display start position when the this window is opened is as follows: first time : Display starts from the first address of the RAM area. Second and subsequent times : Display starts from the address at which an active status window was closed. (if an active status window has never been closed, display starts from the first display start position). Figure 6-31 Memory Window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View]menu (Memory window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
163
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening Click the Mem button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Memory].
Explanation of each area (1) Addr (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ... (3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ... (1) Addr
This area displays memory addresses. The address width changes when memory banks are used. (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ...
This area is used to display and change memory contents, and to display the access status (refer to "5. 7. 3 Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected)"). Black Green Red Blue No access Read Write Read & write
Values are changed through direct input.The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. Up to 256 bytes can be specified at one time.
164
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ...
This area is used to display and change the memory contents in ASCII characters. This area is displayed when [View] menu -> [Ascii] is selected. Data can be changed in this area in the same manner as in the memory display area. The changing method is the same as in (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ....
[View]menu (Memory window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Memory Window is active. Bin Oct Dec Hex Nibble Byte Word Double Word Ascii Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays in 4-bit units. Displays in 8-bit units (default). Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units. Selects whether ASCII characters are displayed or not. Checked: Displayed Not checked: No display (default) Displays in little endian (default). Displays in big endian. This area is used to set about Access monitor function (when IECUBE connected). Clears the display color through the access monitor function (when IECUBE connected). Enables/disables cumulative display of access status (memory content change) (when IECUBE is connected). Checked : Cumulative display of memory contents changes Not checked : Display of only memory contents changes from previous update
Little Endian Big Endian Access Monitoring Clear Accumulative
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
165
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Context menu
Move... Bin Oct Dec Hex Nibble Byte Word Double Word Ascii
Moves the display position. Opens the Address move dialog box. Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays in 4-bit units. Displays in 8-bit units (default). Displays in 16-bit units. Displays in 32-bit units. Selects whether ASCII characters are displayed or not. Checked: Displayed Not checked: No display (default) Clears the display color through the access monitor function (when IECUBE connected). Enables/disables cumulative display of access status (memory content change) (when IECUBE is connected). Enables/disables cumulative display of access status (memory content change). Checked : Cumulative display of memory contents changes Not checked : Display of only memory contents changes from previous update
Clear Access Monitor Accumulative
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Memory Search dialog box and searches for character strings from the displayed memory contents, or memory contents. Selected data (a memory value) is displayed in the Memory Search dialog box as data to be searched.If the Memory Search dialog box is opened without data specified, specify data from the keyboard. The result of the search is highlighted in the Memory window. Searches the memory contents satisfying the search condition set in the Memory Search dialog box, forward (upward on screen) from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the button during a search. Searches the memory contents satisfying the search condition set in the Memory Search dialog box, backward (downward on screen) from the address at the cursor position. This button is displayed as the button during a search. Stops searching. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Cannot be selected. Closes this window.
<<
>>
Stop (during search) Refresh Modify... Close
166
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Search dialog box
This dialog box is used to search the memory contents of the part of the Memory window at which the cursor is located. (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) If the cursor is placed in (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ... in the Memory window, the specified data is treated as a binary data string, and if the cursor is placed in (3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ..., the specified data is treated as an ASCI character string, and the contents of these respective areas are searched. By setting each item and then clicking the button, searching can be started. By clicking the button, the direction buttons ("<<" and ">>") in the Memory window can be used for the search. Caution1 Non-mapped, SFR, and I/O protect areas are not searched. Caution2 When a memory bank is used, the specification of addresses for the address space of 0x10000 or
When Internal ROM Bank Is Used".) Figure 6-32 Memory Search Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Memory window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the button in the same window.
Explanation of each area (1) Find What (2) Unit (3) Scan Whole Region (4) Direction (5) Address
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
higher cannot be made for other than bank areas. (Refer to "Figure 6-7
Diagram of Address Space
167
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Find What
This area is used to specify the data to be searched. In the default condition, the string selected in the window that called this dialog box is displayed. As necessary, the character string displayed can be changed. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. (a) When searching (2) +0 +1 +2... ... ... Up to 16 data items can be specified. Delimit each data with a "blank character". (b) When searching (3) 0 1 2 3 ... ... ... Up to 256 characters can be specified. A "blank character" in the data is treated as a blank character. (2) Unit
This area is used to specify the number of bits of the data to be searched in (2) +0 +1 +2... ... .... Byte Word Double Word Searches the data as 8-bit data (default). Searches the data as 16-bit data. Searches the data as 32-bit data.
(3) Scan Whole Region
This should be checked to search the entire specified range. (4) Direction
This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search. Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor (default).
168
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Address
This area is used to specify the address to be searched. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or
Function buttons
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified character string is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Stops searching. Closes this dialog box. (During searching, this button is replaced by the button.) Displays this dialog box online help files.
Set Find Stop (during searching) Cancel Help
expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
169
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Fill dialog box
This dialog box is used to fill the memory contents in the Memory window with specified codes (fill code). (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Caution When a memory bank is used, the specification of addresses for the address space of 0x10000 or
When Internal ROM Bank Is Used".) Figure 6-33 Memory Fill Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Fill...].
Explanation of each area (1) Address (2) fill code (1) Address
This area is used to specify the memory address range whose contents are filled. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or
170
expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
higher cannot be made for other than bank areas (Refer to "Figure 6-7
Diagram of Address Space
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) fill code
This area is used to specify the data (fill code) used when filling the range specified in (1) Address. Up to 16 binary data strings (byte data strings) can be specified. Delimit each data with a "blank character".
Function buttons
OK Stop (during filling) Cancel Restore Help
Fills the specified data in accordance with a given condition. Stops filling. Closes this dialog box. (During filling, this button is replaced by the button.) Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
171
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Copy dialog box
This dialog box is used to copy the memory contents in the Memory window . (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Caution When a memory bank is used, the specification of addresses for the address space of 0x10000 or higher and the specification of the copy destination cannot be made for other than bank areas. (Refer
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Copy...].
Explanation of each area
(1) Address
This area is used to specify the copy source and copy destination addresses. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or
172
expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
to "Figure 6-7
Diagram of Address Space When Internal ROM Bank Is Used".) Figure 6-34 Memory Copy Dialog Box
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) From: Specify the address range (start address -- end address) of the copy source. (b) To: Specify start address of the copy destination.
Function buttons
OK Stop(during copying) Cancel Restore Help
Copies the memory contents in accordance with a given condition. Stops copying. Closes this dialog box. (During copying, this button is replaced by the button.) Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
173
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Compare dialog box
This dialog box is used to compare the memory contents in the Memory window. (Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Caution When a memory bank is used, the specification of addresses for the address space of 0x10000 or higher and the specification of the comparison destination cannot be made for other than bank areas.
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Edit] menu -> [Memory] -> [Compare...].
Explanation of each area
(1) Address
This area is used to specify the comparison source address and comparison destination address. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or
174
expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
(Refer to "Figure 6-7
Diagram of Address Space When Internal ROM Bank Is Used".) Figure 6-35 Memory Compare Dialog Box
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(a) Mem1 Specify the address range (start address -- end address) of the comparison source. (b) Mem2 Specify the start address of the comparison destination.
Function buttons
OK
Compares the memory contents in accordance with a given condition. If no difference is found as a result of comparison, " Wf200: No difference encountered." is displayed. If a difference is found, the Memory Compare Result dialog box is opened. Stops memory comparison. Closes this dialog box. (During comparison, this button is replaced by the button.) Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
Stop (during comparison) Cancel Restore Help
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
175
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Memory Compare Result dialog box
This dialog box is displayed if any difference is found in the memory contents when the memory has been compared in the Memory Compare dialog box .(Refer to "5. 7 Memory Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-36 Memory Compare Result Dialog Box
- Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Explanation of each area
(1) (comparison result display area)
This area displays the results of comparing the memory. Only differences that have been found as a result of comparison are displayed. (a) Mem1 Addr Displays a comparison source address in which a difference has been found. (b) Memory Displays the data in which a difference has been found (Left: Comparison source data,Right: Comparison destination data ). (c) Mem2 Addr
Displays the comparison destination address at which a difference has been found.
176
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Close Help
Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
177
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Register window
This window is used to display and change registers (general-purpose registers, control registers) (refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function"). Other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Each area in this window are the jump pointer of the Jump function. Caution The register contents can be updated for each real-time monitor sampling time in the Extended Option dialog box during user program execution. However, display is not performed for PC and SP, PSW contents (when IECUBE connected) (refer to "5. 12 The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). Figure 6-37 Register Window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View]menu (Register window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons
Opening Click the Reg button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Register].
178
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Register bank setting area (2) Upper field (general-purpose register display area) (3) Lower field (control register display area) (1) Register bank setting area
This area is used to display and set general-purpose register bank numbers. (a) Register Bank : Sets the register bank number displayed in this area. (b) Current Bank : Displays the register bank number that is currently set. (2) Upper field (general-purpose register display area)
This area is used to display and change the general-purpose registers. Register values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. (3) Lower field (control register display area)
This area is used to display and change the control registers. By double-clicking "+", flag name and flag value are displayed (first character changes from "+" to "-").Expanded display is canceled by double-clicking "-" (first character changes from "-" to "+"). When memory banks are used, the address width of the "PC" register increases by 8 bits. Register values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
179
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
[View]menu (Register window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Register window is active. Bin Oct Dec Hex Absolute Name Function Name Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays hexadecimal numbers (default). Displays register names as absolute names. Displays register names as function names (default).
Context menu
Add Watch... Bin Oct Dec Hex
Registers a selected character string to the Watch window. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Displays the selected line in binary numbers. Displays the selected line in octal numbers. Displays the selected line in decimal numbers. Displays the selected line in hexadecimal numbers (default).
Function buttons Refresh Modify... Close Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Cannot be selected. Closes this window.
180
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
SFR window
This window is used to display and change the contents of SFR and the I/O ports that have been registered in the Add I/O Port dialog box. (Refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function".) A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Caution1 However, that the values of read-only SFR and I/O ports cannot be changed. In addition, the SFR and I/O ports that cause the device to operate when they are read are read-protected and therefore cannot be read. To read these registers, select a register, and select and execute [Compulsion Read] from the Context menu. Caution2 During user program execution, the SFR contents are updated at each sampling time set in the Extended Option dialog box (refer to "5. 12 The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected)"). However, since a copy of the value during CPU access is read during program
execution, the correct value may not be obtained in the case of an SFR whose value changes within a peripheral (when IECUBE is connected). Remark1 The display start position when the window is opened is as follows. First time: Display from SFR of minimum address Second and subsequent times: Display from first SFR when window was last closed Figure 6-38 SFR Window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View] menu (SFR window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
181
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening Click the SFR button, or select [Browse] menu -> [SFR].
Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Attribute (3) Value (1) Name
This area displays the names of SFR and I/O ports. If the value of an I/O port address is not defined, the I/O port name displayed in light color. (2) Attribute
This area displays the attributes of SFR and I/O ports. This area displays the read/write attributes, access types, and displays and absolute addresses from the left side. When the bit SFR is displayed, bit-offset value is also displayed. It can be specified whether this area is displayed or not, by selecting [View] menu -> [Attribute]. Read/Write Attribute R W R/W * Read only Write only Read/write Register that is read via an emulation register to prevent the device from operating when this register is read. To read this attribute directly from a SFR, execute [View] menu -> [Compulsion Read]. Even a write-only SFR can also be read via an emulation register. However, some devices do not support this function.
Access Type 1 8 16 Can be accessed in Bit units. Can be accessed in Byte units. Can be accessed in Word units.
182
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
32 (3) Value
Can be accessed in Double Word units.
This area is used to display and change the contents of a SFR and I/O port. The contents are displayed differently as follows, depending on the attribute: Black Display -** Read only or read/write Write only Value changes if read
Values are changed through direct input. The location to be changed is displayed in red and the contents of the contents of the change are written into the target memory when the Enter key is pressed. The previous value can be canceled by the ESC key. Note that the values of read-only SFR and I/O ports cannot be changed. The value of read-protected SFR and I/O ports can be read by selecting Context menu -> [Compulsion Read].
[View] menu (SFR window-dedicated items) When this window is the current window, The following items are added on [View] menu. Bin Oct Dec Hex Sort By Name Sort By Address Unsort Attribute Pick Up Select... Compulsion Read Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers(default). Displays in alphabetical order. Displays in address order (default). Does not sort. Switches on/off display of (2) Attribute. Displays only the registers selected in the SFR Select dialog box. Opens the SFR Select dialog box. Forcibly reads the SFR that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports and I/O protect area added in the Add I/O Port dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
183
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Context menu
Move... Add Watch... Add I/O Port... Bin Oct Dec Hex Sort By Name Sort By Address Unsort Attribute Pick Up Select... Compulsion Read
Opens the Address move dialog box. Opens the Add Watch dialog box. Opens the Add I/O Port dialog box. Displays binary numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers (default). Displays in alphabetical order. Displays in address order (default). Does not sort. Switches on/off display of (2) Attribute. Displays only the registers selected in the SFR Select dialog box. Opens the SFR Select dialog box. Forcibly reads the SFR that are disabled from being read because their values will be changed, or the data of the I/O ports and I/O protect area added in the Add I/O Port dialog box.
Function buttons
Refresh Modify... Close
Updates the contents of this window with the latest watch data. Cannot be selected. Closes this window.
184
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
SFR Select dialog box
This dialog box is used to select SFR and I/O ports that are not displayed the SFR window. (Refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function".) It is also used to specify the sequence in which registers and ports are displayed. Figure 6-39 SFR Select Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the SFR window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Select...].
Explanation of each area (1) Display, Pick Up, No Display (2) Arrange (3) Sort by
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
185
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Display, Pick Up, No Display
This area is used to select SFR / I/O ports that are displayed in the SFR window, and those that are not. (a) Display The SFR / I/O ports displayed in the SFR window. (b) No Display The SFR / I/O ports not displayed in the SFR window. (c) Pick Up The following buttons are used to change SFR/ I/O ports to be displayed in the SFR window. << Show Hide >> << Show All Hide All >> Moves SFR / I/O ports selected from (b) No Display list to (a) Display. Moves SFR / I/O ports selected from (a) Display list to (b) No Display. Moves all SFR / I/O ports to (a) Display. Moves all SFR / I/O ports to (b) No Display.
Two or more registers can be selected by clicking any of the above buttons while holding down the Ctrl or Shift key. (2) Arrange
The following buttons are used to change the display sequence in (a) Display. Top Up Down Bottom Moves the selected SFR or I/O port to the top of the list. Moves the selected SFR or I/O port one line up. Moves the selected SFR or I/O port one line down. Moves the selected SFR or I/O port to the bottom of the list.
186
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Sort by
The following buttons are used to change the display sequence in (b) No Display. Name Address Displays in alphabetical order. Displays in address order.
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
Reflects the selection in this dialog box in the SFR window and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
187
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Add I/O Port dialog box
This dialog box is used to register an I/O port to be added to the SFR window. (Refer to "5. 8 Register Manipulation Function".) Figure 6-40 Add I/O Port Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Option] menu ->[Add I/O Port...].
Explanation of each area (1) I/O Port List (2) Name (3) Address (4) Access (5) Read/Write
188
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) I/O Port List
This area lists the I/O ports currently registered. If a new I/O port is registered, it is added to this list. An I/O port already registered can be selected and changed or deleted by Function buttons. (2) Name
This area is used to specify an I/O port name to be added (up to 15 characters long). (3) Address
This area is used to specify the address of the I/O port to be added. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol.
Area can be specified (4) Access
This area is used to select the access size of the I/O port to be added. Byte Word 8-bit unit (default) 16-bit unit
(5) Read/Write
This area is used to specify the access attribute of the I/O port to be added. In the default condition, all the attributes are not checked (i.e., the I/O port can be both read and written).
(Refer to "Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols".) Target area , SFR area
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
189
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help Add Change Delete
Reflects the result of addition in the SFR window and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changing , closes this dialog box. Restores the original status. Displays this dialog box online help files. Adds an I/O port of the specified address. Changes the setting of the I/O port selected in (1) I/O Port List. Deletes the I/O port selected in (1) I/O Port List.
190
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Timer dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box is used to register and set timer event conditions, and display execution time measurement results. (Refer to "5. 11 Event Function", "5. 9 Timer Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) The execution time display area can be constantly displayed as the Timer Result dialog box by clicking the button. Registration and setting of timer event conditions is done by setting each item (256 items max.) in this dialog box and then pressing the button. The registered timer event conditions are managed by the Event Manager. The number of timer event conditions that can be simultaneously used (validated) is limited (refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition"). The execution time measurement result is displayed when the set timer event condition is selected. Remark The measurement result display contents are updated at each sampling time of the The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected), even during user program execution. Figure 6-41 Timer Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function)
Opening Click the Tim button, or select [Event] menu -> [Timer...].
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
191
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Timer Name (2) Start Event, End Event (3) Time (4) Execution time display area (5) Count Rate (6) Time Out Break (7) Event Manager (1) Timer Name
This area is used to set a timer event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list. To display from user program execution until break, specify "Run-Break" (refer to "5. 9. 2 Run-Break event").
gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated. (2) Start Event, End Event
This area is used to set an event condition for the timer.
Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (3) Time
This area is used to select the unit in which the timer measurement result is to be displayed. "nsec" is displayed when a new event is created. nsec usec msec Nanoseconds (default) Microseconds Milliseconds
192
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
For the number of items that can be set to this area, refer to "Table 6-17
Number of Events Settable".
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 5-17
Event icon"). The
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
sec min
Seconds Minutes
(4) Execution time display area
Values"). Caution
Measurement results that cannot be trusted due to counter overflow are displayed in red.
Pass Total Average Max Min
Number of passes Total execution time in the measurement zone specified by start event and end event conditions Average execution time Maximum execution time Minimum execution time
Connected IE IECUBE
Measurable Execution Time 1 minute and 25 seconds max. (Resolution = 41 ns) 48 hours and 50 minutes max. (2K division, resolution = 41 us) 65535 times max.
(a) Function buttons Initialize Copy View Always Clears the measurement results. Copies the measurement result to the clipboard in text format. Opens the Timer Result dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 6-13
Measurable Values Measurable Execution Count 4294967295 times max. (32 bit)
This area displays the result of measuring the execution time of the program (refer to "Table 6-13
Measurable
193
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Count Rate
This area is used to set the timer count rate value used for execution time measurement. The timer count rate value can be set for each timer event condition. The rate value can be selected from x1 to x2048 from a drop-down list. (6) Time Out Break
This area is used to set the operation and its duration when the measurement time in the block specified in (2) Start Event, End Event (time from occurrence of start event until occurrence of end event) , and the Run-Break measurement time, exceed the specified time (timeout time). Caution During Run-Break measurement, OFF or Overflow are the only settings.
(a) Time Out Break settings Settings related to timeout breaks. ON OFF Overflow If the timeout time specified in (b) Timeout time setting is exceeded, a timeout break occurs. No timeout break occurs (default).
(b) Timeout time setting Timeout time setting can be done through direct input.
This setting is invalid when "OFF" or "Overflow" was selected in (a) Time Out Break settings . (7) Event Manager
tion in event manager area".)
Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager.
194
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-17
Input up to the measurable maximum time (refer to "Table 6-13
Measurable Values") is possible.
Event icon", "(4) Manipula-
A timeout break occurs at the largest measurable time (refer to "Table 6-13 Measurable Values").
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Timer Result dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box displays the result of measuring the execution time. (Refer to "5. 9 Timer Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) By clicking the button in the Timer dialog box, this dialog box is opened corresponding to a timer event condition on a one-to-one basis. Two or more of this dialog box can be simultaneously opened. Up to 256 + 1 (Run-Break event) Timer Result dialog boxes can be opened, the number of events that can be measured at the same time is the number of valid events described in "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition" + 1 (Run-Break event). Remark The measurement result display contents are updated at each sampling time of the The Real-time Monitor Function (When IECUBE Connected), even during user program execution. Figure 6-42 Timer Result Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select a timer event condition in the Timer dialog box , click the button.
Explanation of each area (1) Execution time display area Same area is Timer dialog box. Refer to "(4) Execution time display area" .
Function buttons
Initialize Copy Close Help
Clears the measurement results. Copies the measurement result to the clipboard in text format. Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
195
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace window
IECUBE This window used to display the trace results. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) Display updates are performed during breaks or during step execution. This window has Mixed display mode (Trace window). Also, It has "5. 14. 3 Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected)". A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons, etc., can be performed in this window. Figure 6-43 Trace Window
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View]menu (Trace window-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons
Opening Click the TrW button, or select [Browse] menu -> [Trace].
196
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Point mark display area (2) Trace mode display area (3) Trace result display area (1) Point mark display area This area displays the Event Setting Status (Event Mark). If an execution event or access event is set at the corresponding trace address, the mark corresponding to the type of the event is displayed. The mark displayed is not that during trace but an event mark that is set when the trace result is displayed. (2) Trace mode display area This area displays the type of trace mode. A Q S T Unconditional traced or section traced frame Qualify traced frame Step execute frame Delay trigger frame
(3) Trace result display area (a) (b) (c) (d)
This area displays the trace results. In the ID78K0-QB, a horizontal line (block information) is displayed to indicate the end of program execution.
Cause Event Break Trace Full Break Trace Delay Break Non Map Break Read Protect Write Protect Break by event
Break because trace memory is full Break by trace delay A non-mapped break has been accessed. Read was attempted from read protected area An attempt has been made to write to a write-protected area.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
The "Table 6-14
Cause of Stopping Tracer" is displayed when the tracer is stopped.
Table 6-14
Cause of Stopping Tracer Meaning
197
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Cause SFR Illegal SFR Read Protect SFR Write Protect Manual Break Stack Overflow Stack Underflow Uninitialize Stack Pointer Software Break Uninitialize Memory read Time Over Break Unspecified Illegal Fetch Guard Trace Stop IMS(IXS) Illegal Flash Illegal Retry Over Peripheral Break Before Execution SFR was illegally
Read from prohibited SFR was attempted Write to write-prohibited SFR was attempted. Manual break Break by stack overflow Break by stack underflow Break due to failure to perform stack pointer initialization Break by software break Memory not initialized has been read. Break because execution time is over. Others Fetch guard break Trace stop IMS, IXS Illegal break Flash Illegal break RETRY count over break Break from peripheral Before Execution
Whether each of the following sub-areas is displayed or not can be selected in the Trace Data Select dialog box. (a) Frame This area displays the trace flame number. (b) Address Data Status (fetch access display)
This area displays the result of fetching the program. (i) Status
The following types of statuses are available: M1 OP IF (ii) Fetching of first byte of instruction If the fetch address is the start of the symbol, the first line is highlighted in blue. Opecode fetch of 2nd and subsequent bytes Invalid fetch or status unknown Address Data
This area displays the address and data. Address Displays the fetch address
198
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 6-14
Cause of Stopping Tracer Meaning
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Data (c)
Displays the fetch data
Address Data Status (data access display)
This area displays the result of accessing data. Status VECT RW R W (d) DisAsm This area displays the result of disassembly (only when (i) Status is M1). Vector read Data read/write Data read Data write
[View]menu (Trace window-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Trace window is active. Select... Pick Up Off Search Snap Mix Selects the contents to be displayed. Opens the Trace Data Select dialog box. Performs the setting for pickup display. Does not pick up and display (default). Picks up and displays a frame that satisfies the search condition. Cannot be selected. Specifies whether the source file are displayed in mixed display mode, or not displayed. Checked: Mixed display Not checked: No display (default) Links the Trace window with the following windows: (Refer to "5. 14. 3 Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected)".) A checked window is linked. Links the Source window. Links the Assemble window. Links the Memory window. Cannot be selected.
Window Synchronize
Source Text Assemble Memory Coverage
Context menu
Move... Trace Clear Select...
Moves the display position. Opens the Trace move dialog box. Clears the trace data. Selects the contents to be displayed. Opens the Trace Data Select dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
199
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Pick Up Off Search Snap Mix
Performs the setting for pickup display. Does not pick up and display (default). Picks up and displays a frame that satisfies the search condition. Cannot be selected. Specifies whether the source file are displayed in mixed display mode, or not displayed. Checked: Mixed display Not checked: No display (default) Links the Trace window with the following windows: (Refer to "5. 14. 3 Trace result with linking window (when IECUBE connected)".) Links the Source window. Links the Assemble window. Links the Memory window. Cannot be selected. Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value at the cursor position as the jump destination address (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function"). If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Disassembles and displays starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function"). Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents starting from the jump destination address specified by the data value at the cursor position (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function"). Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Cannot be selected.
Window Synchronize Source Text Assemble Memory Coverage Source Text
Assemble
Memory
Coverage
Function buttons
Search...
Opens the Trace Search dialog box and searches or picks up trace results. The searched result will be highlighted in the Trace window. Same function as [View] menu -> [Search . Searches forward (upward on screen) for a trace result that satisfies the search condition set in the Trace Search dialog box. This button cannot be selected during pickup display. Searches backward (downward on screen) for a trace result that satisfies the search condition set in the Trace Search dialog box. This button cannot be selected during pickup display. Updates the contents of the window with the latest data. Closes this window.
<<
>>
Refresh Close
200
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Search dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box is used to search or pick up trace data in the Trace window. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) By setting each item and then clicking the button, searching can be started. By clicking the button, the direction buttons (<< and >>) in the Trace window can be used for the search. Remark This dialog box is used to search trace data if it is opened by selecting [View] -> [Pick Up] -> [Off] from the menu bar. It is used to pick up and display trace data if it is opened by selecting [View] -> [Pick Up] -> [Search] from the menu bar. Caution1 This dialog box cannot be called if picking up the first M1 fetch frame (BRM1) after program branch is specified using the menu bar or in the Trace Data Select dialog box. Caution2 When a memory bank is used, the specification of addresses for the address space of 0x10000 or
When Internal ROM Bank Is Used".) Figure 6-44 Trace Search Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Trace window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Search...], or click the button in the same window.
Explanation of each area (1) Event Status (2) Access Size (3) Address, Mask
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
higher cannot be made for other than bank areas (Refer to "Figure 6-7
Diagram of Address Space
201
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Data, Mask (5) Scan Whole Region (6) Direction (7) Frame (1) Event Status
This area is used to select a status condition. If a status condition is omitted, all frames (All status) are searched. All status M1 Fetch R/W Read Write (2) Access Size All frames (default) M1 fetch Data read/write (including R, W) Data read Data write
This area is used to select an access size condition. By specifying an access size condition, the access width of a data condition to be detected by an access event is determined. Byte Word Bit Searches for a data condition with 8-bit width (only during 8-bit access). Searches for a data condition with 16-bit width (only during 16-bit access). Searches for a data condition with 1-bit width (only during 8-bit access). In this case, a data condition is searched with 1-bit width. Because of the operation of the in-circuit emulator, access to a bit is not directly traced; the ID78K0-QB searches a dummy bit access by internally setting address conditions and data conditions as follows: Input example: Address: FE20.1 Data: 1 | Setting of trace search Address: FE20 Data: 00000010B Mask: 11111101B If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits of the same address are accessed, therefore, a trace data is searched in accordance with the specified status if the address and bit match the specified value of [address.bit]. CautionIf an access event is specified as a status condition, the alternative of Bit is not displayed. If Bit or 1 is specified, an error occurs.
202
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
If no access size condition is specified, a judgment is automatically made from the address condition and data condition, and the following is set: - Bit if the address condition is set in bit units - Byte if the data condition is set in 8-bit units - Word if the data condition is set in 16-bit units (3) Address, Mask
This area is used to specify an address condition. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. A symbol can be also specified by a symbol or
The following can be set:
Settable range 0 <= address value <= 0xFFFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFFFF 0 <= address value <= (n <<) | 0xFFFF 0 <= mask value<= (n << 16) | 0xFFFF When banks not used
(a) Address Set an address condition (lower address - higher address) (may be omitted). The following can be set: (i) Setting as a point
Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address. (ii) Setting as a range
Set a value to the lower address and the higher address. Mask cannot be set. (iii) Setting as a bit Set a value to only the lower address, or set the same value to the lower address and the higher address. Specify a value in the form of address.bit. Mask cannot be set. The value of bit, which indicates the bit position, must be 0 <= bit<= 7. (b) Mask Set a mask value for an address value (only when (i) Setting as a point). Mask may be omitted. The address value of a bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1.
expression ("Table 5-6
Specifying Symbols").
Table 6-15
Settable Range of Address Condition (Trace) Condition
When banks used (n = max. value of bank number used)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
203
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Example 1: Address Mask 0x4000 to 0x4000 0xFF
With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition. Example 2: Address Mask 0x4000 to 0x4000 0x101
With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition. (4) Data, Mask
This area is used to set data conditions. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in (2) Access Size. (Refer
(a) Data
Symbols"). (b) Mask Set a mask value for the data value. When a mask is set, the data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1. Example 1: Data Mask 0x4000 0xFF
With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition. Example 2: Data Mask 0x4000 0x101
With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition. (5) Scan Whole Region
This should be checked to search the entire specified range.
204
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Set a data value as data conditions. A data can be also specified by a symbol (refer to "Table 5-6
to "Table 6-21
Settable Range of Data Condition".)
Specifying
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(6) Direction
This area is used to specify the direction of the search. Up Down Forward search. Searches data forward (upward on screen) from the current position of the cursor. Backward search (default). Searches data backward (downward on screen) from the current position of the cursor.
(7) Frame
This area is used to specify a frame number to be searched. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. A symbol can be also specified by Frame Number Specification Format.
Function buttons
Find Next
Searches the specified data in accordance with a given condition. If the specified frame is found as a result of a search, it is highlighted. To continue searching, click this button again. Sets the specified condition as the search condition and closes this dialog box. Picks up according to the specified condition of data search. If a frame that satisfies the condition is found as a result of a search, it is picked up. To pick up a frame that satisfies a different condition, press this button again. Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files.
Set Find Pick Up (Stop (during search)) Cancel Help
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
205
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace Data Select dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box is used to select items to be displayed in the Trace window. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) Figure 6-45 Trace Data Select Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Trace window is the current window, select [View] -> [Select...] menu.
Explanation of each area (1) Item (2) Radix (3) Pick Up (1) Item
This area is used to select items to be displayed in the Trace window. may not be selected. The field checked is displayed.
206
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Displaying the following items may or
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Frame Instruction Fetch Address Instruction Fetch Data Instruction Fetch Status Memory Access Address Memory Access Data Memory Access Status DisAssemble (2) Radix
(a) Frame field Address field in (b) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Data field in (b) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Status field in (b) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Address field in (c) Address Data Status (data access display) Data field in (c) Address Data Status (data access display) Status field in (c) Address Data Status (data access display) (d) DisAsm field
This area is used to select the radix in which data is to be displayed. Displaying the following items may or may not be selected. Instruction Fetch Data Memory Access Data Data field in the (b) Address Data Status (fetch access display) Data field in the (c) Address Data Status (data access display)
HEX DEC OCT Bin
Displays hexadecimal numbers. (default) Displays decimal numbers. Displays octal numbers. Displays binary numbers.
(3) Pick Up
This area is used to select a pick up condition. Pick Up Off Pick Up Search Frame Pick Up Snap Frame
No pick up display (default) Picks up and displays a frame that satisfies the search condition. Cannot be selected.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
207
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
Reflects the results of selection in this dialog box in Trace window. Closes this dialog box. Restores the original status. Displays this dialog box online help files.
208
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace move dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box is used to specify the position from which displaying the Trace window is started. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) Figure 6-46 Trace Move Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the Trace window is the current window, select [View] menu -> [Move...].
Explanation of each area (1) Frame selection area
This area is used to specify the frame at the destination. 1st frame of last block Moves the display start position to the first frame in the newest block frame of trace data. The display start position is moved to the first frame of the trace data when using an in-circuit emulator without a block frame. Moves the display start position to the trigger frame in the newest block frame of trace data. Moves the display start position to the last frame of trace data.
Trigger frame of last block Last frame of last block
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
209
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Frame No.
Moves the display start position to the specified frame number. In the default condition, the character string selected in the window that called this dialog box or "Last" is selected. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. If 0 is specified, the display start position is moved to the first frame of trace data. In addition, frame number can also be specified in the following format. Up to 16 input histories can be recorded. Table 6-16 Frame Number Specification Format Contents Moves backward (downward on screen) the display start position from the frame at the cursor by the specified number of frames (numeric value). Moves forward (upward on screen) the display start position from the frame at the cursor by the specified number of frames (numeric value). Moves the display start position to the first frame Same as "1st frame of last block" Same as "Trigger frame of last block" Same as "Last frame of last block" Moves the display start position to the last frame
Specification +numeric value -numeric value Top First Trigger Last Bottom
Abbreviation None None O S T L B
Function buttons
OK Cancel Restore Help
Starts trace display from the specified position. Closes this dialog box. Restores the input data to the original status. Displays this dialog box online help files.
210
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Trace dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box is used to register, set, and display trace event conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event Function", "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) The trace event conditions for when performing conditional trace are specified in this dialog box (refer to "Table
Registration and setting of trace event conditions is done by setting each item (256 items max.) in this dialog box and then pressing the button. The registered trace event conditions are managed by the Event Manager. The number of trace event conditions that can be simultaneously used (validated) is limited (refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition"). Figure 6-47 Trace Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function)
Opening Click the Trc button, or select [Event] menu -> [Trace...].
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
5-14
Types of Conditional Trace" ).
211
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area
(1) Trace Name
This area is used to set a trace event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated. (2) Qualify
This area is used to set an event condition for a qualify trace (refer to "5. 10. 5 Setting conditional trace"). If two or more events are set, trace is performed when each event occurs. The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is as follows:
Connected IE IECUBE 18 (8/10)
Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions".
212
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 6-17
Number of Events Settable Total (execution/access)
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 5-17
(5)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
Trace Name Qualify Delay Trigger Section1, Section2, Section3, Section4 Event Manager
Event icon"). The
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Delay Trigger
This area is used to set an event condition for a delay trigger trace (refer to "5. 10. 5 Setting conditional trace").
Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (4) Section1, Section2, Section3, Section4
This area is used to set event conditions for starting and stopping a section trace (refer to"5. 10. 5 Setting conditional trace"). Up to 4 ranges from Section 1 to Section 4 can be specified simultaneously.
Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (5) Event Manager
tion in event manager area".)
Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-17
For the number of items that can be set to this area, refer to "Table 6-17
For the number of items that can be set to this area, refer to "Table 6-17
Number of Events Settable".
Number of Events Settable".
Event icon", "(4) Manipula-
213
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Delay Count dialog box
IECUBE This dialog box is used to set or display delay count values. (Refer to "5. 10 Trace Function (When IECUBE Connected)".) By setting a delay count value, a trace can be executed the number of times specified by the delay count value after the delay trigger event condition set in the Trace dialog box has been satisfied. (Refer to "5. 10. 5 Setting conditional trace".) Figure 6-48 Delay Count Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Event ] menu -> [Delay Count...].
Explanation of each area (1) Delay Count
The following items can be selected. FIRST MIDDLE LAST Places the trigger pointer at the first of the trace data, traces all frames, and then stops the tracer. Places the trigger pointer at the center of the trace data, traces a half of all frames, and then stops the tracer. Places the trigger pointer at the end of the trace data and immediately stops the tracer.
214
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
OK Restore Cancel Help
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Restores the previous settings. Closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
215
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Event Manager
This window is used to manage event conditions. This window allows display, enabling/disabling, and deletion of the Various Event Conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event Function".) A number of other operations using Context menu, Function buttons (Related event function), etc., can be performed in this window. The event icon is the jump pointer of the Jump function. Figure 6-49 Event Manager (In detailed display mode)
- Opening - Explanation of each area - [View]menu (Event manager-dedicated items) - Context menu - Function buttons (Related event function)
Opening Click the Mgr button, or select [Event] menu -> [Event Manager].
Explanation of each area (1) Event display area This area displays the icons (event icons) of the registered Various Event Conditions. By selecting the context menu -> [Detail], the details can be displayed. (a) [In list displayed]
The event icon is the jump pointer (refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function").
216
Displays event icon (refer to "Table 5-17
Event icon").
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) In detailed display
Details of event contents are displayed by using the following key information as a separator.
Key Information Event condition [S] [Z] [AR] [A] [D] [DR] [P] [M] Break condition [B] Break condition Status condition Access size condition Address range condition
Address condition Symbol or expression: (actual address) Data condition Symbol or expression: (actual address) Data range condition Pass count condition (when IECUBE connected) Mask condition
Trace condition (when IECUBE connected) [M] [T] [D] [S1] - [S4] [E1] - [E4] [Q] Trace mode Delay trigger condition Delay Count Section trace start condition Section trace end condition Qualify trace condition
Timer condition (When IECUBE Connected) [S] [E] [R] [U] [B] Timer measurement start condition Timer measurement end condition Timer division ratio Timer measurement unit Time out break condition
Table 6-18
Separator for Displaying Event Details Contents
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
217
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
[View]menu (Event manager-dedicated items) The following items are added in the [View] menu , when the Event Manager is active. Select All Event Delete Event Sort By Name Sort By Kind Unsort Detail Overview Selects all the registered events. Deletes a selected event. Displays icons in the order of event names. Displays icons in the order of event types. Does not sort icons (default). Displays the details List display (default)
Context menu
Sort By Name Sort By Kind Unsort Detail Overview Source Text
Displays icons in the order of event names. Displays icons in the order of event types. Does not sort icons (default). Displays the details. List display (default). Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the position of the selected event as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) If no line information exists at the jump destination address, however, you cannot jump. Opens the Source window. If an active Source window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the Assemble window from the position of the selected event, which is used as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Assemble window. If an active Assemble window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Displays the memory contents from the position of the selected event, which is used as the jump destination address. (Refer to "5. 14. 2 Jump function".) Opens the Memory window. If an active Memory window is open, that window is displayed in the forefront (so that it can be manipulated). Cannot be selected.
Assemble
Memory
Coverage
218
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons (Related event function) Describes the all function buttons the related event dialogs (the Event Manager, the Event dialog box, the Break dialog box, the Trace dialog box and the Timer dialog box.) OK (Event dialog box) Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this dialog box. In the select mode An event condition is selected and the setting dialog box (indicated on the title bar) that called the Event Link dialog box is displayed again. If the calling dialog box has already been closed, the select mode is returned to the normal mode, and the Event dialog box is not closed. Otherwise, this dialog box will be closed. (Other than above dialog boxes) Automatically registers the event condition being edited, if any, and closes this dialog box. Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered. New (Event Manager) Opens the dialog box to create new event condition. By clicking each button of ,,, and the corresponding event setting dialog box can be opened with the new event name set. After the event setting dialog box has been opened, this dialog box is closed. Returns to Event Manager by clicking the button. (Other than above dialog boxes) Newly creates an event condition in this dialog box. An event condition name is automatically created and a new event condition is prepared. Set (Event dialog box) Registers the various event conditions. Because the dialog box is not closed even after an event has been registered, new event conditions can be registered. In the select mode An event condition is selected. If there is an event being edited, it is automatically registered and selected. (Other than above dialog boxes) Registers the various event conditions. Because the dialog box is not closed even after an event has been registered, new event conditions can be registered. Each event condition becomes valid as soon as it has been registered. Enable/Disable Validates (enables) or invalidates (disables) the selected event condition. However, event conditions cannot be enabled or disabled. Same operation as the clicking the mark of event icon. Clears the contents of the event condition. Restores the contents of an edited event condition. If an event condition not registered is displayed, all the fields other than the event name field are blank or the default values are set. Closes this dialog box. Even if an event condition is being edited, it is not registered and the dialog box is closed. Displays the help window of this window. Cannot be selected. Opens the Break dialog box. Opens the Trace dialog box (when IECUBE connected) .
Clear Restore
Cancel / Close
Help Event Link... Break... Trace...
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
219
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Snap Shot... Stub... Timer... DMM... Manager Add Event...
Cannot be selected. Cannot be selected. Opens the Timer dialog box (when IECUBE connected) . Cannot be selected. Opens the Event Manager. Opens the Event dialog box in the select mode, and selects or newly creates an event condition to be set. The event condition will be added to the area selected when the < Add Event...> button is pressed. Cannot be selected. Opens the various event setting dialog box corresponding to the selected event condition (one). Each setting dialog box displays the contents of the selected event condition. Same operation as double-clicking the event icon or pressing the Enter key. Deletes the selected event. When an event condition or an event link condition is to be deleted, an error occurs and the event condition or event link condition cannot be deleted if the event is used as a various event condition. Deletes all event conditions except software break events Turns on (Expand>>>) or off (Shrink<<<) display of the event manager area. The size of the dialog box is expanded or reduced. The event condition selected in Event Manager area add to setting area with a focus. Opens the Select Display Information dialog box. This dialog box is used to change the display mode and rearrange event names.
Add Link... Open
Remove / Delete
Delete All Expand >>> / Shrink <<< Add Info...
...... Sorts events into name order. ......... Sorts events into type order. .................. Displays events in the order in which they have been registered without sorting the events. .................... Sets the detailed display mode. .............. Sets the list display mode. ................. Closes this dialog box (same as ESC key). Other... Opens the dialog box for selecting the event type. By clicking each button of ,,, and the corresponding event setting dialog box can be opened with the new event name set. After the event setting dialog box has been opened, this dialog box is closed. ............ Opens the Event Manager. .................. Closes the dialog box to create event condition.
220
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Figure 6-50
Select Display Information Dialog Box
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Software Break Manager
This window is used to display, enable or disable, and delete software breaks . (Refer to "5. 4. 4 Hardware break and software break".) Software breakpoints cannot be set in this window; they can be set in the Source window or the Assemble window. (Refer to "5. 4. 2 Breakpoint setting".) Caution Software breaks can be set or deleted while the user program is being executed. While the user program is being executed, software breaks can be set ,deleted, enable or disable. The warning of a purport which makes a user program once take a break is displayed. Figure 6-51 Software Break Manager
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [Event] menu -> [Software Break Manager].
Explanation of each area (1) Name (2) Brk (3) File#Line / Symbol+Offset (4) Address
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
221
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Name
This area displays the names of registered events, and the check boxes that indicate whether each event is enabled or disabled. An event name is displayed in the form of Swb+[number] in the default condition. It can be changed to an alphanumeric string of up to 256 characters. To change an event name, select and click a name. Then directly edit the name. To set the editing, press the Enter key. When an event is enabled, the check box is checked. To be disable, the check box is not checked. Furthermore, the name jumps to the Source window by double-clicking an event name if the event name corresponds to the source line, whereas the name jumps to the Assemble window if it does not correspond to the source line. Remark By clicking "Name" (on the label), the character strings of the displayed items can be compared and sorted lexicographically (in alphabetical order). Whether the character strings are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be alternately selected by clicking the mouse. (2) Brk
The '>' mark is displayed for a software break event that is set at the current PC position (so that the software break event that caused a break can be easily identified). (3) File#Line / Symbol+Offset
This area displays the location at which a software break event was set as follows: - Program$file name#line number (If the event corresponds to the source line. ) - Program$file name#symbol+offset (If the event dose not correspond to the source line. Events are evaluated based on this when a symbol is re-downloaded. Remark By clicking "File#Line/Symbol+Offset" (on the label), the character strings of the displayed items can be compared and sorted lexicographically (in alphabetical order). Whether the character strings are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be alternately selected by clicking the mouse.
222
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Address
This area displays the address at which a software break event is set. Remark By clicking "Address" (on the label), the numeric values of the displayed items can be compared and sorted. Whether the values are compared or sorted in ascending or descending order can be alternately selected by clicking the mouse.
Function buttons
Enable Disable Delete Delete ALL Close
Enables the selected event. Disables the selected event. Deletes the selected event. Deletes all the set software break events. Closes this window.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
223
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Event dialog box
This dialog box is used to register and display event conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event Function".) Setting of event conditions is done by setting each item in this dialog box and then pressing the button. The registered event conditions are managed by the Event Manager. One event condition can be set for multiple Various Event Conditions. However, the number of event conditions that can be simultaneously used is limited (refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition"). Figure 6-52 Event Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function)
Opening In normal mode If the Event dialog box is opened as follows, an event condition can be registered without its purpose being specified. Click the Evn button, or select [Event] menu -> [Event...]. In select mode If the button is pressed when the Event dialog box has been opened as follows, an event condition can be registered in the setting dialog box from which this dialog box was opened (the setting dialog box from which the this box was opened is displayed on the title bar.). In each various event setting dialog box, click the button.
224
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Event Name (2) Event Status (3) Access Size (4) Address (5) Data, Mask (6) Pass Count (7) Event Manager (1) Event Name
This area is used to set an event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list. In the select mode, the selected event condition can be set in the event condition setting area of the setting dialog box that called the Event dialog box.
gray E. mark indicates that the event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. (2) Event Status
This area is used to select a status condition. By specifying a status condition, the type of the execution event and an access event is determined (if an execution event is specified, nothing can be input to the (3) Access Size and (5) Data, Mask). The status conditions that can be specified are listed below.
Table 6-19 Status condition Status Execution event Execution Before Execution Access event R/W Read Write RW R W Memory read/write Memory read Memory write EX EX-B Program execution (when IECUBE connected) Program execution (break before execution)Note Abbreviation
Meaning
Note
Only usable for break conditions
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events (refer to "Table 5-17
Event icon"). The
225
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(3) Access Size
This area is used to select an access size condition. By selecting an access size condition from the drop-down list, the access width of a data condition to be detected by an access event is determined. Byte Word No Condition Bit Detects data condition with 8-bit width (only during 8-bit access). Detects data condition with 16-bit width (only during 16-bit access). Does not detect access size (nothing can be input to the Data area). Detects data condition with 1-bit width (only during 8-bit access). In this case, a data condition is detected with 1-bit width. Because of the operation of the in-circuit emulator, access to a bit is not directly detected; the ID78K0-QB detects a dummy bit access by internally setting address conditions and data conditions as follows: Input example: Address: FE20.1 Data: 1 | Setting of trace search Address: FE20 Data: 00000010B Mask: 11111101B If another bit of the same address is accessed or if all the 8 bits of the same address are accessed, therefore, an event is detected in accordance with the specified status if the address and bit match the specified value of [address.bit]. Caution When data is written to a bit, all the 8 bits are read/written. If read or read/write is specified as the status, an event occurs if a read operation is performed at this time if the value of the specified [Address.bit] matches. If no access size condition is specified, a judgment is automatically made from the address condition and data condition, and the following is set: - Bit if the address condition is set in bit units - Byte if the data condition is set in 8-bit units - Word if the data condition is set in 16-bit units - No Condition if no data condition is specified
226
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(4) Address
This area is used to specify an address condition (address value). Caution When a memory bank is used, the specification of addresses for the address space of 0x10000 or
When Internal ROM Bank Is Used".)
Settable range When banks not used 0 <= address value <= 0xFFFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFFFF When banks used 0 <= address value <= (n <<) | 0xFFFF 0 <= mask value <= (n << 16) | 0xFFFF -
(a) Address Select the address range (specification method) from a drop-down list and specify the address value in areas A: and B:. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to Specifying Symbols). When MINICUBE is connected, only x == A can be selected. No Condition x == A x >= A x <= B A <= x <= B Don't care (specify all address values) Specify address value specified for A: Specify address value higher than address value specified for A: Specify address value lower than address value specified for B: Specify address value within address range from A: to B: In this case, 2 events are used when item other than before execution event is specified. Specify value outside address range from A: to B:
x < A && B < x
Table 6-20
Settable Range of Address Condition (Event) Remark
n = max. value of bank number used n = max. value of bank number used
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
higher cannot be made for other than bank areas (Refer to "Figure 6-7
Diagram of Address Space
227
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(5) Data, Mask
This area is used to set data conditions. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. The settable range differs as follows depending on the access size condition specified in (3) Access Size.
Access Size Byte Word Bit 0 <= data value <= 0xFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFF 0 <= data value <= 0xFFFF 0 <= mask value <= 0xFFFF
Data value = 0 or 1 Mask value = Cannot be specified.
(a) Data Select the data range (specification method) from a drop-down list and specify the data value in areas A: and B:. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal. An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression (refer to Specifying Symbols). When MINICUBE is connected, only "No Condition" and "x == A" can be selected. No Condition x != A x == A x >= A x <= B A <= x <= B x < A && B < x Don't care (specify all data values) Specify data value not matching data value specified for A: Specify data value matching data value specified for A: Specify data value higher than data value specified for A: Specify data value lower than data value specified for B: Specify data value within data range from A: to B: In this case, 2 events are used. Specify data value outside data range from A: to B:
Caution
"No Condition" can be specified to be either address condition ((a) Address) or data condition ((a) Data).
228
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 6-21
Settable Range of Data Condition Settable range
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(b) Mask Set a mask value for the data value. When a mask is set, the data value for the bit whose mask value is 1 may be 0 or 1. Example 1: Data Mask 0x4000 0xFF
With this setting, addresses 0x4000 to 0x40FF satisfy the condition. Example 2: Data Mask 0x4000 0x101
With this setting, addresses 0x4000, 0x4001, 0x4100, and 0x4101 satisfy the condition. (6) Pass Count
A pass count specifies how many times an event condition must be satisfied during user program execution before a given condition is satisfied (when IECUBE connected). If no pass count is specified, 1 is assumed (the condition is satisfied as soon as the event condition is satisfied). If "Before Execution" is specified in (2) Event Status, this area is invalid. Table 6-22 Connected IE IECUBE 1 - 255 Pass Count Range
(7) Event Manager
tion in event manager area".)
Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-17
Event icon", "(4) Manipula-
229
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Break dialog box
This dialog box is used to register; set, and display break event conditions. (Refer to "5. 11 Event Function", "5. 4 Break Function".) Registration and setting of break event conditions is done by setting each item (256 items max.) in this dialog box and then pressing the button. The registered break event conditions are managed by the Event Manager. There are restrictions on the number of break event conditions that can be simultaneously set (enabled). (Refer to "5. 11. 4 Number of enabled events for each event condition".)
Remark
Break event condition setting/enable/disable/delete operations are possible even during user program execution. Figure 6-53 Break Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons (Related event function)
Opening Click the Brk button, or select [Event] menu -> [Break...].
Explanation of each area (1) Break Name (2) Break Event (3) Event Manager
230
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Break Name
This area is used to set a break event name. Directly input an alphanumeric string of up to eight characters as a name. To display the contents of an already created event condition, select from the drop-down list.
The gray mark indicates that an event condition is being edited and has not been registered yet. By clicking the left mark, an event condition can be validated or invalidated. (2) Break Event
This area is used to set an event condition for break. The number of event conditions that can be set in this area is as follows: Table 6-23 Number of Events Settable in Break Condition Setting Area Connected IE IECUBE MINICUBE
Total (before execution / after execution / access) 34 (16 / 8 / 10) 2 (1a / 0 / 1)
a.
When the software break is used, it is 0
Setting of event conditions is easily done by dragging the icon of the event to be set from the event manager area and dropping it in this area. For details, refer to "5. 11. 3 Setting event conditions". (3) Event Manager
Manipulation in event manager area".)
Function Buttons Refer to " Function buttons (Related event function)" in the Event Manager.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to display the list of the events registered. (Refer to "Table 5-17
Event icon", "(4)
The mark on the left of this area indicates the utilization status of events. (Refer to "Table 5-17
Event icon").
231
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
View File Save dialog box
This dialog box is used to save the current display information of the current window to a display file. (Refer to "5. 13. 2 Window display information (view file)".) Figure 6-54 View File Save Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the window to be saved is the current window, select [File] menu -> [Save As...].
Explanation of each area (1) Save in :, File name : (2) Save as type : (3) Save range (1) Save in :, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be saved. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified.
232
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(2) Save as type :
Files".) The extension of the file corresponding to the current window is displayed. (3) Save range
Specify the range of data to be saved. This area is displayed if the current window to be saved is the Assemble window, Memory window, Source window, Trace window. (a) All This should be selected to save the entire range, from the first line to the last line. (b) Screen shot This should be selected to save the area visible on the screen, from the top line on the screen to the bottom line. If the Source window is in the mixed display mode, however, the window contents are saved from the source line that includes the area visible on the screen. (c) Specify Line / Specify Frame / Specify Address
This should be selected to specify the start line and end line of the area to be saved. If the start line and end line are omitted, the first line and last line are assumed. If a range of 100 lines / 100 frames / 256 bytes or more is specified, a message dialog box is displayed to indicate the progress of saving. To stop saving midway, click the button in the message dialog box. Display any of the following corresponding to the current window: Specify Line Specify the range of the line numbers to be saved. The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. If the Source window is in the mixed display mode, the mixed displayed part on the specified line is also saved. Specify the range of trace frames to be saved. (Refer to "Table 6-16 Frame Number Specification Format".) The default radix for inputting a numeric value is decimal. Specify the range of address to be saved . An address can be also specified by a symbol or expression. (Refer to "Table 5-6 Specifying Symbols".) The default radix for inputting a numeric value is hexadecimal.
Specify Address
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Specify Frame
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be saved. (Refer to "Table 5-19
Type of the View
233
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Save Cancel Help Restore
Saves the display information of the current window to the selected file. After saving, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened.
234
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
View File Load dialog box
This dialog box is used to read the view files. (Refer to "5. 13. 2 Window display information (view file)".) When a display file is loaded, the reference window (Source window in static status) opens and the display information at saving is displayed. The window to be opened and its status differ as follows, depending on the file to be loaded. - Loading source file to which symbol information has been read If there is a Source window in the active status, it is opened in the static status; otherwise, the Source window is opened in the active status. - Loading source file to which symbol information has not been read, or view file A window of text-format files is opened in the Source window in the static status. Figure 6-55 View File Load Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Click the Open button or select [File] menu -> [Open...].
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
235
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type : (1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type :
Files".)
Function buttons
Open Cancel Help
Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files.
236
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be loaded. (Refer to "Table 5-19
Type of the View
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Environment Setting File Save dialog box
This dialog box is used to save the setting contents of the current window to a setting file. (Refer to "5. 13. 3 Window setting information (setting file)".) Figure 6-56 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening When the window to be saved is the current window, select [File] menu -> [Environment] -> [Save As...].
Explanation of each area (1) Save in :, File name : (2) Save as type : (1) Save in :, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be saved. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Save as type :
Setting Files"). The extension of the file corresponding to the current window is displayed.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be saved. (Refer to "Table 5-20
Type of the
237
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Save Cancel Help Restore
Saves the setting information of the current window to the selected file. After saving, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files. Restores the status before this dialog box was opened.
238
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Environment Setting File Load dialog box
This dialog box is used to read the setting files. (Refer to "5. 13. 3 Window setting information (setting file)".) When a setting file is loaded, the target window opens and the setting information at saving is restored. Figure 6-57 Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening select [File] menu -> [Environment] -> [Open...].
Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type : (1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be loaded. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type :
Setting Files".)
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be loaded. (Refer to "Table 5-20
Type of the
239
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Function buttons
Open Cancel Help
Loads the selected file. After loading the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files.
240
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Reset Debugger dialog box
This dialog box is used to initialize the ID78K0-QB, CPU, and symbol information. Figure 6-58 Reset Debugger Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Select [File] menu -> [Debugger Reset...].
Explanation of each area (1) Reset subject selection area
This area is used to specify what is to be Initialized. Initializes the checked item. Debugger Symbol Target CPU Initializes the ID78K0-QB (default). Initializes the symbol information. Initializes the CPU.
Function buttons
OK Cancel Help
Initializes according to the setting. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
241
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Exit Debugger dialog box
This dialog box is used to select whether the current debug environment is saved to a project file or not before terminating the ID78K0-QB. (Refer to "5. 13. 1 Debugging environment (project file)".) It can be specified in the Debugger Option dialog box that the ID78K0-QB is terminated without this confirmation dialog box being opened. Figure 6-59 Exit Debugger Dialog Box
- Opening - Function buttons
Opening - Select [File] menu -> [Exit]. - If forcible termination, such as to terminate the application, has been executed on the task list that terminates Windows.
Function buttons
Yes
Saves the current debug environment to a project file, closes all the windows, and terminates the ID78K0-QB. If a project file name is not specified, the Project File Save dialog box is opened. If the < Cancel> button is selected on the Project File Save dialog box, the environment is neither saved to a project file nor is the ID78K0-QB terminated. (If a project file is loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button has the default focus. ) Closes all the windows and terminates the ID78K0-QB. (If a project file is not loaded or saved during debugger operation, this button has the default focus.) Closes this dialog box without executing anything.
No
Cancel
242
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
About dialog box
This dialog box displays the version information of the ID78K0-QB (the year is displayed in 4 digits). Remark The version information can be copied to the clipboard by selecting [Select All and Copy (&C)] from the context menu in the dialog box. The following version information is displayed: - Product version of ID78K0-QB - Version of device file - Version of GUI - Version of debugger DLL - Version of assembler DLL - Version of executor - Version of packet DLL - Version of Tcl/Tk - Product ID and product version of in-circuit emulator Figure 6-60 About Dialog Box
- Opening - Function buttons
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
243
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Opening Select [Help] menu -> [About...], or click the button in the Configuration dialog box.
Function buttons
OK
Closes this dialog box.
244
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Console window
This window is used to input commands that control the ID78K0-QB . Because the key bind is Emacs-like, the accelerator key is not acknowledged if the Console window is active. However, the F1 key displays the online help files of the Console window. While the Console window is open, an error message window with only an button is displayed in the Console window. Refer to "CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE" for details on the command specifications. Figure 6-61 Console Window
- Opening
Opening Select [Browse] menu -> [Console].
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
245
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Font dialog box
This dialog box is used to select the font and font size to be displayed in the Source window, Watch window, Quick Watch dialog box, Local Variable window, Stack Trace window. Figure 6-62 Font Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Click the button in the Debugger Option dialog box.
Explanation of each area
246
(3)
(2)
(1)
Font Face : Size : Sample
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Font Face :
This area is used to select a font from the fonts currently usable. Only fonts with equal width (fonts with a constant stroke width and a fixed pitch) are enumerated. When a font name is selected from the list, the font name is displayed in the text box, and the font size that can be used with that font is displayed under (2) Size :. (2) Size :
This area is used to specify the font size (unit : pt.). On the drop-down list, the font size usable for the font specified in (1) Font Face : is displayed in point units. When the font size is selected from the drop-down list, the selected font size is displayed in this area. The font size can also be directly input to the text box from the keyboard. (3) Sample
This area displays a sample character string of the specified font and size.
Function buttons
OK Cancel
Validates the settings and closes this dialog box. Cancels the changes and closes this dialog box.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
247
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
Browse dialog box
This dialog box is used to select the file to be set in the Source Text move dialog box. Remark If this dialog box is opened for the first time after the system has been started up, the directory first specified by the source path is displayed. When the dialog box is opened the second and subsequent times, the previously displayed directory is recorded and displayed again. If the button is pressed, however, the previously displayed directory is not recorded. Figure 6-63 Browse Dialog Box
- Opening - Explanation of each area - Function buttons
Opening Click the button in the target dialog box.
Explanation of each area (1) Look In:, File name : (2) Files of type :
248
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 6 WINDOW REFERENCE
(1) Look In:, File name : This area is used to specify the file name to be opened. A file name can be directly input from the keyboard, or selected from the list. Up to 257 character string with a extension can be specified. (2) Files of type :
Displayed").
Function buttons
Open Cancel Help
Sets the selected file. After setting the file, this dialog box is closed. Closes this dialog box without executing anything. Displays this dialog box online help files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
This area is used to specify the type (extension) of the file to be opened (refer to "Table 5-5
File Type Can Be
249
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
This chapter explains the details of the command functions of the ID78K0-QB. - Command Line Rules - Command List - List of Variables - List of Packages - Key Bind - Expansion window - Callback Procedure - Hook Procedure - Related Files - Cautions - Explanation of Commands - Samples (Calculator Script)
7. 1
Command Line Rules
The specification of command lines has the following rules: - Command name, option, and argument are specified for command line. - To divide words, a space (space key or tab key) is used. - At the end of a line, a line feed character or a semicolon is used. - When a command name and an option are entered to the point of identifiability, they are recognized. - In script, command names have to be entered completely.
Command format command -options arg1 arg2 arg3 ...
250
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
7. 2
Command List
Table 7-1 ID78K0-QBList of Debugger Control Commands Command name address assemble
Evaluation of address expression Converts the address expression specified with expression into address. Disassemble/line assemble (a) Assembles the character strings specified by code from the address specified by address. Executing batch (with echo) Executes in batch with displaying files specified by script name on the screen. Setting/deletion of breakpoint (b) Operates the breakpoint specified by options and address. Terminating ID78K0-QB Terminate the ID78K0-QB. Download of files (l) Downloads files specified with filename according to options. Creation of expansion window Creates expansion window with script file. Returning from function Executes until it returns to the program that called the current function. Continuous execution (g) Executes program continuously. Display of help Displays Dcl help. Setting of hook Sets the procedure for hook with script file. Display/setting of IE register The ie command depends on the IE. Symbol inspect Searches and displays the symbol of the load module specified with progname using the regular expression of pattern. Jump to window (j) Displays the window specified by options. Setting / deleting memory mapping Sets, deletes, and displays memory mapping. Setting of expansion window Sets the size and title name of the expansion window. Display/setting of memory (m) Sets value in the memory of the address specified with address according to options. Display of the list of files and functions Displays the list of files and functions of the load module specified by progname. Procedure step (n) Executes the procedure steps.
batch breakpoint dbgexit download extwin finish go help hook ie inspect
jump map mdi memory module next
Function
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
251
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
Table 7-1 ID78K0-QBList of Debugger Control Commands Command name refresh register reset run step stop upload version watch where wish xtime xtrace
Redrawing of window Redraws the window and updates the data. Display/setting of register value and SFR value Sets value in the register specified with regname. Reset Resets the CPU, ID78K0-QB debugger or symbols. Reset and execution of CPU (r) Resets the program and executes it. Step execution (s) Executes step execution. Stop execution Stops the program forcibly. Upload Saves the memory data within the specified range in a file. Display of the version information Displays the version of the ID78K0-QB. Display/setting of variables (w) Displays and sets the variables. Trace of stack Executes the back-trace of the stack. Start of Tclet Starts up the script using Tk (Tclet). Operation of timer (when IECUBE connected) Operates timer. Operation of tracer (when IECUBE connected) Operates tracer.
Command name alias cd clear echo exit history ls pwd source time Creation of another name Change of directory Clears the screen Echo Close/end Display of history Display of files Check of the directory Execution of batch Measurement of time for commands
252
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 7-2
Function
List of Console/Tcl Commands Function
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
Command name tkcon unalias which Other 7. 3 List of Variables Console control Deletion of another name
Display of the command path or another name Based on Tcl/Tk 8.4
- dcl(chip) - Chip name read only - dcl(prjfile) - Project file name read only - dcl(srcpath) - Source path read only - dcl(ieid) - IE type read only - dcl(iestat) - IE status read only - dcl(bkstat) - Break status read only - env(LANG) - Language - dcl_version - Dcl version read only
7. 4
List of Packages
- tcltest - Restoration test - cwind - Automatic window control - BWidget - Toolkit - Tcllib - Tcl library - mclistbox - Multi-column list box - combobox - Combo box
7. 5
Key Bind
- tcsh + emacs like - Complement of command name [Tab] - Complement of file name [Tab] - HTML help [F1]
7. 6
Expansion window
The expansion windows can be created using Tk. In the expansion windows, Widget is allocated with '.dcl' as a root instead of '.'. When the following script files are allocated in bin/idtcl/tools/, an expansion window is added on selecting [Browse] menu - [Others]. The mdi command, an exclusive command for expansion windows, has been added.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 7-2
List of Console/Tcl Commands Function
253
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
# Sample.tcl wm protocol .dcl WM_DELETE_WINDOW { exit } mdi geometry 100 50 button .dcl.b -text Push -command exit pack .dcl.b Caution In expansion windows, Tk menu commands cannot be used because of the restrictions of MDI windows.
7. 7
Callback Procedure
Expansion windows can hold dcl_asyncproc procedures called by asynchronous messages. proc dcl_asyncproc {mid} { if {$mid == 19} { redraw } } The asynchronous message ID is passed for the argument of the dcl_asyncproc procedure The message IDs are shown below:
Message ID 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 18 19 20 36 37 40 41 42 45 After changing configuration After registering event After deleting event Before executing After breaking After resetting CPU After resetting ID78K0-QB After changing extended option After changing debugger option After downloading After changing memory or register
Before starting tracer(when IECUBE connected) After stopping tracer (when IECUBE connected) Before starting timer (when IECUBE connected) After stopping timer (when IECUBE connected) After clearing trace (when IECUBE connected) After resetting symbol
254
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table 7-3
Message ID Meaning
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
7. 8
Hook Procedure
A hook can be set in the ID78K0-QB using the hook procedure. The hook procedures are shown below: - BeforeDownload (Hook before downloading) - AfterDownload (Hook after downloading) - AfterCpuReset(Hook after CPU reset) - BeforeCpuRun (Hook before starting execution) - AfterCpuStop (Hook after breaking) By using hook procedures, register values can be changed before downloading programs or after resetting the CPU. An actual example of the procedure is shown below. A hook is valid till the ID78K0-QB is closed. [When hook is set with ID78K0-QB control command] 1) 2) 3) Create script file a. with an editor. Start up the ID78K0-QB, select [Browse] menu -> [Console], and open the Console window. If the script file is executed in the window as below, the hook in the script file is set. %hook test.tcl [When hook is set on downloading of project file] 1) Create script file a. with an editor. Caution Be sure that the script file name is the same as the project file. Example: The script file corresponding to test.prj is test.tcl. Allocate test.prj, test.pri, and test.tcl in the same directory. 2) Start up the ID78K0-QBand read test.prj. The hook in the script file is set.
proc BeforeDownload {} { register MM 0x7 register PMC8 0xff register PMC9 0xff register PMCX 0xe0 } proc AfterCpuReset {} { register MM 0x7 register PMC8 0xff register PMC9 0xff register PMCX 0xe0 }
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
255
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
7. 9
Related Files
- Executes when the aliases.tcl console is opened. Sets the default alias etc. - Executes when the project file name.tcl project is opened. The hook of BeforeDownload, AfterDownload, AfterCpuReset, BeforeCpuRun and AfterCpuStop can be used. - Executes when the load module name.tcl load module is downloaded. The hook of BeforeDownload, AfterDownload, AfterCpuReset, BeforeCpuRun and AfterCpuStop can be used.
7. 10
Cautions
- The separator for file and path is a slash (/). - When a console or an expansion window is active, the accelerator key cannot be acknowledged. - When a console is open, error messages are output to the console. - To terminate the command forcibly, close the console. - The execution of external commands (DOS commands) is OFF by default.
7. 11
Explanation of Commands
In this section, each command is explained using the format shown below.
Command name
Describes the command name.
Input format Describes the input format of the command. In the following explanation, italics indicate an Argument to be supplied by the user, while the argument enclosed in "?" may be omitted. When a command name and an option are entered to the point of identifiability, they are recognized.
Functions Explains the functions of the command.
Usage example Shows an example of the usage of the command.
256
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
address
address - Evaluation of address expression
Input format address expression
Functions Converts the address expression specified by expression into address.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % address main 0xaa (IDCON) 2 % address main+1 0xab
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
257
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
assemble
assemble - Disassemble/line assemble
Input format assemble ?options? address ?code?
Functions Assembles the character strings specified by codefrom the address specified by address. When '.' is specified for address, it is understood as an address continuing from the immediately previous assemble. When code is omitted, it is assembled from the address specified by address. The following are options: They are ignored for assembly. -code -number number Command code is also displayed.It is ignored for assembly. number line is displayed. It is ignored for assembly.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % assemble -n 5 main 0x000000aa B7 PUSH HL 0x000000ab B1 PUSH AX 0x000000ac 891C MOVW AX,SP 0x000000ae D6 MOVW HL,AX 0x000000af A100 MOV A,#0H (IDCON) 2 % assemble main mov a,b (IDCON) 3 % assemble . mov a,b
258
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
batch
batch - Executing batch (with echo)
Input format batch scriptname
Functions Executes in batch with displaying files specified by scriptname on the screen. Nesting is possible.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % clear (IDCON) 2 % batch bat_file.tcl (IDCON) 3 % tkcon save a:/log.txt
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
259
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
breakpoint
breakpoint - Setting/deletion of breakpoint
Input format breakpoint ?options? ?address1? ?address2? breakpoint -delete brkno breakpoint -delete brkno breakpoint -disable brkno breakpoint -information
Functions Operates the breakpoint specified by options and address . If a breakpoint can be set correctly, the breakpoint number is returned. The following are options: -software -hardware -execute -beforeexecute -read -write -access -size size -data value -datamask value -pass value -information -delete -disable -enable A software break is specified. A hardware break is specified (default). The address execution break is set (default). The break before address execution is set. An address data read break is set. An address data write break is set. An address data access break is set. The access size is set (8, 16bit). The data condition is set. The data mask is set. The path count is set. The list of breakpoints is displayed. The breakpoint whose number is specified is deleted. The breakpoint whose number is specified is disabled. The breakpoint whose number is specified is enabled.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % breakpoint main 1 (IDCON) 2 % breakpoint -i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17 (IDCON) 3 % breakpoint -software sub 2
260
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
(IDCON) 4 % breakpoint -i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17 2 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#8 (IDCON) 5 % breakpoint -disable 2 (IDCON) 6 % breakpoint -i 1 Brk00001 enable rammon.c#17 2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8 (IDCON) 7 % breakpoint -delete 1 2 Brk00001 disable rammon.c#8
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
261
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
dbgexit
Tdbgexit - Terminating ID78K0-QB
Input format dbgexit ?options?
Functions Terminate the ID78K0-QB. The following are options: -saveprj Project is saved on terminating ID78K0-QB.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % dbgexit -saveprj
262
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
download
download - Download of files
Input format download ?options? filename ?offset?
Functions Downloads files specified with filename according to options. If offset is specified, the address is shifted by the offset (if the data is in binary format, the load start address is specified for offset). -binary -nosymbol -symbolonly -erase -reset -information Binary format data is downloaded. Download is executed. Symbol information is not read. Symbol information is read. The contents of the internal flash memory are erased all before download (only a product with internal flash memory) (when MINICUBE connected). CPU is reset after download. Download information is displayed.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % download test.lmf
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
263
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
extwin
extwin - Creation of expansion window
Input format extwin scriptfile
Functions Creates expansion window with scriptfile.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % extwin d:/foo.tcl
264
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
finish
finish - Returning from function
Input format finish
Functions Executes until it returns to the program that called the current function.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % finish
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
265
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
go
go - continuous execution
Input format go ?options?
Functions Executes program continuously.If -waitbreak is specified, the command waits until the program stops. The following are options: -ignorebreak -waitbreak Breakpoint is ignored. The command waits for the program to stop.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % go -w
266
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
help
help - Display of help
Input format help
Functions Displays Dcl help.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % help
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
267
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
hook
hook - Setting of hook
Input format hook scriptfile
Functions Sets the procedure for hook with scriptfile. The hook setting is initialized when the project file is loaded and when the ID78K0-QB is reset.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % hook d:/foo.tcl
268
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
ie
ie - Display/setting of IE register
Input format ie reg address ?value? ie dcu address ?value?
Functions The ie command depends on the IE. When reg is specified for the subcommand, referencing and setting of the IE register is executed.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % ie reg 0x100 1
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
269
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
inspect
inspect - Symbol inspect
Input format inspect ?options? progname pattern
Functions Searches and displays the load module symbol specified with progname using the regular expression of pattern. The following regular expressions can be used. ? * [chars] \x The following are options: -nocase -address Does not distinguish between upper and lowercase. Displays in pair with symbol address. Match 1 character Match characters other than 0 Match chars character. Range specification such as [a-z/0-9] also possible. Match character x. ? ? * [ ] \ specification also possible.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % inspect test1.out {[a-z]*}
270
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
jump
jump - Jump to window
Input format jump -source -line filename ?line? jump ?options? address
Functions Displays the window specified by options. -source -assemble -memory -line -focus The Source window is displayed from the address specified by address. The Assemble window is displayed from the address specified by address. The Memory window is displayed from the address specified by address. The command is moved to the line specified by line. The Focus is moved to the window displayed.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % jump -s main (IDCON) 2 % jump -s -l mainfile.c 10 (IDCON) 3 % jump -m array
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
271
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
map
map - Setting/deletion of memory mapping
Input format map options address1 address2 ?accsize?
Functions Sets, deletes, and displays memory mapping. The access size of 8, 16, or 32 is specified by accsize (unit:byte, the default is 8). The following are options: -target -protect -clear -information Target area is mapped. I/O protect area is mapped. All the settings for the mapping are deleted. Refer to the setting for the mapping.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % map -i 1: 0 0x7fff 8 {IROM} 2: 0x8000 0x87ff 8 {Target RRM} 3: 0x8800 0x9fff 8 {Target} 4: 0xa000 0xf7ff 8 {NonMap} 5: 0xf800 0xfaff - {NonMap} 6: 0xfb00 0xfedf 8 {Saddr} 7: 0xfee0 0xfeff 8 {Register} 8: 0xff00 0xffff 8 {SFR} (IDCON) 2 % map -erom 0x100000 0x10ffff (IDCON) 3 % map -c
272
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
mdi
mdi - Setting of expansion window
Input format mdi geometry ?x y? width height mdi title string
Functions Sets the size and title name of the expansion window. The command can be used only from the expansion window.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % mdi geometry 0 0 100 100 (IDCON) 2 % mdi title foo
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
273
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
memory
memory - Display/setting of memory
Input format memory ?options? address ?value? memory ?options? -fill address1 address2 value memory ?options? -copy address1 address2 address3
Functions Sets value in the memory of the address specified by address according to options. If value is omitted, display the value of the memory of the address specified by address. If -fill is specified, data from address1 to address2 is filled with value . If -copy is specified, data from address1 to address2 is copied to address3. The following are options: -byte -word -fill -copy -noverify Displayed/set in one-byte units (default). Displayed/set in word units. The data is filled in. The data is copied. Verification is not executed on writing.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % memory 100 0x10 (IDCON) 2 % memory 100 2 (IDCON) 3 % memory 100 0x02 (IDCON) 4 % memory -fill 0 1ff 0
274
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
module
module - Display of the list of files and functions
Input format module progname ?filename?
Functions Displays the list of files and functions of the load module specified by progname. If filename is not specified, the list of files is displayed. If filename is specified, the list of functions of the specified files is displayed.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % module rammon.lmf 1: rammon.c (IDCON) 2 % module rammon.lmf rammon.c 1: rammon.c sub1 2: rammon.c main
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
275
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
next
next - Procedure step
Input format next ?options?
Functions Executes the procedure steps. If functions are called, the step stops after executing function. The following are options: -source -instruction The command is executed in source line units (default). The command is executed in command units.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % next -i (IDCON) 2 % next -s
276
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
refresh
refresh - Redrawing of window
Input format refresh
Functions Redraws the window and updates the data.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % batch foo.tcl (IDCON) 2 % refresh
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
277
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
register
register - Display/setting of register value and SFR value
Input format register ?options? regname ?value?
Functions Sets value in the register specified with regname. If value is omitted, displays the value of the register specified by regname. The following are options: -force -bankno bankno Compulsory reading is executed. Bank no is specified.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % register pc 0x0100 (IDCON) 2 % register pc 200 (IDCON) 3 % register pc 0x200
278
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
reset
reset - Reset
Input format reset ?options?
Functions Resets the ID78K0-QB , CPU or symbols. If options are omitted, the CPU is reset. The following are options: -cpu -debugger -symbol -event CPU is reset (default). The ID78K0-QB is reset. Symbol is reset. Event is reset.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % reset
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
279
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
run
run - Reset and execution of CPU
Input format run ?options?
Functions Resets the program and executes it. If -waitbreak is not specified, the command does not wait until the program stops. The following are options: -waitbreak The command waits for the program to stop.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % run (IDCON) 2 % run -w
280
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
step
step - Step execution
Input format step ?options?
Functions Executes step execution. If functions are called, the command stops at the head of the functions. The following are options: -source -instruction The command is executed in source line units (default). The command is executed in command units.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % step -i (IDCON) 2 % step -s
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
281
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
stop
stop - Stop executing
Input format stop
Functions Stops the program forcibly.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % run (IDCON) 2 % stop
282
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
upload
upload - Upload
Input format upload ?options? filename address1 address2
Functions Saves the memory data within the specified range in a file. The following are options: -binary -intel -motorola -tektronix -force The data is saved in binary format. The data is saved in Intel HEX format (default). The data is saved in Motorola HEX format. The data is saved in Tektronix HEX format. The file is overwritten.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % upload -b foo.hex 0 0xffff
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
283
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
version
version - Display of the version information
Input format version
Functions Displays the version of the ID78K0-QB.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % version GUI : E2.00y [31-May-99] Devicefile : 78K0[uPD780034] E1.01a Debugger : 78K/0 Debugger E2.50c [02-Apr-99] Executer : 78K/0 Executer E1.3c Packet translator : 78K/0 Packet E2.00w Assembler : 78K/0 Asm/Disasm E1.15a [01-Apr-99] Tcl/Tk : 8.1.1
284
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
watch
watch - Display/setting of variables
Input format watch ?options? variable ?value?
Functions Displays and sets the variables. The following are options: -binary -octal -decimal -hexdecimal -string -sizeof -encoding name The value is displayed in binary digits. The value is displayed in octal digits. The value is displayed in decimal digits. The value is displayed in hexdecimal digits. The value is displayed in character strings. The size, instead of the value, of variables is displayed in decimal digits. Encoding during character string display is specified. By default, system encoding is used. name (encoding name) is based on the Tcl specification (shiftjis, euc-jp, etc.).
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % watch var 0x10 (IDCON) 2 % watch -d var 16 (IDCON) 3 % watch array\[0\] 0xa
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
285
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
where
where - Trace of stack
Input format where
Functions Executes the back-trace of the stack.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % where 1: test2.c#sub2(int i)#13 2: test.c#num(int i)#71 3: test.c#main()#82
286
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
wish
wish - Startup of Tclet
Input format wish scriptname
Functions Starts up the script using Tk (Tclet). The expansion window can be created with Tclet.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % wish test.tcl
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
287
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
xtime
When IECUBE connected xtime - Operation of timer
Input format xtime option
Functions Operates timer. The following are options: -start -stop -gobreak Timer starts on executing the program. Timer stops on executing the program. Time from Go to Break is displayed in nsec.
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % xtime -start (IDCON) 2 % xtime -stop
288
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
xtrace
When IECUBE connected xtrace - Operation of tracer
Input format xtrace -dump ?-append? frameno ?filename? xtrace -start xtrace -stop xtrace -clear xtrace -mode ?mode?
Functions Operates tracer. The following are options: -start -stop -clear -dump The tracer starts on executing the program. The tracer stops on executing the program. Clears the trace memory. The trace data is dumped (default). The dump result is redirected to the console window. If the file name is specified, the dump result is written in the file. The dump result is added to a file. The trace control mode (any one of: all, cond, nonstop, fullstop, fullbreak, delaystop, delaybreak) is selected. When mode is omitted, the current mode is displayed.
-append -mode ?mode?
Usage example (IDCON) 1 % xtrace -start (IDCON) 2 % xtrace -stop (IDCON) 3 % xtrace -dump 3 _ 01685 2 000000BC M1 br _sub2+0x2 _ 01686 4 0000009A BRM1 st.w r6, 0x8[sp] _ 01687 3 0000009E BRM1 st.w r0, 0x0[sp] (IDCON) 4 % xtrace -clear (IDCON) 5 % xtrace -addup true
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
289
CHAPTER 7 COMMAND REFERENCE
7. 12
Samples (Calculator Script)
The script of the expansion window in which the calculator script is described and its execution screen are shown below.
Script of expansion window # Calculator.tcl mdi geometry 100 100 set top .dcl entry $top.e -relief sunken -textvariable v frame $top.f -height 120 -width 120; pack $top.e -fill x; pack $top.f -fill both -expand 1set i 0; set v {}; set r 0.25 foreach n {7 8 9 / 4 5 6 * 1 2 3 - 0 = + C} { if {$n == "=" || $n == "C"} { button $top.f.b$n -text $n } else { button $top.f.b$n -text $n -command "$top.e insert end $n" } place $top.f.b$n -relx [expr ($i%4)*$r] -rely [expr ($i/4)*$r] -relw $r -relh $r } bind $top.f.bC <1> {$top.e delete 0 end} bind $top.f.b= <1> {catch {expr $v} v} Figure 7-1 Execution Screen incr I
290
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW
APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW
- Overview - Sample List of Expansion Window - Activation - Explanation of each sample window
A. 1
Overview
With the ID78K0-QB, the user can create custom windows in addition to the existing windows. The Tcl (Tool Command Language) interpreter and the commands for controlling the debugger are implemented in the ID78K0-QB. Users can create windows using this Tcl. The ID78K0-QB is supplied with samples of the following expansion windows.
A. 2
Sample List of Expansion Window Table A-1 List of Expansion Window (Sample) Window Name
List window Grep window Hook window
A. 3
Activation
The expansion window can be activated by selecting List, Grep, or Hook in [Others] on the [Browse] menu. Remark Each .tcl file is installed in NECTools32\BIN\idtcl\tools.
A. 4
Explanation of each sample window
Function Displays a list of the source files and functions. Searches a character string. Sets the hook procedure.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
291
APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW
List window
The lists of the source files and functions are displayed in a tree format in this window. When a function name in the list is clicked, the corresponding source is displayed. Figure A-1 List window
When a function name in the list is clicked, the corresponding function portion is displayed in the Source window.
292
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW
Grep window
Search for a character string is performed in the files under the source path. When the search result is clicked, the corresponding source is displayed. Figure A-2 Grep window
By clicking a character string line in the search result,the coressponding character string portion is displayed in the Source window.
Object Pattern button button button Match Case Filter
Input the character string to be searched. Marks the searched character string. Clears the marking. Put the cursor on a section in the search result and click this button to open the corresponding file. Select whether or not to distinguish uppercase and lowercase. Specify the type of the file to be searched.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Function
293
APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW
Hook window
This window is used to set a hook to the debugger, using a hook procedure. The hook procedure enables changing the register value before downloading a program, or after a CPU reset. On this window, a hook can be set by using the following four tabs. - [BeforeDownload] tab: Hook before downloading - [AfterCpuReset] tab: Hook after CPU reset - [BeforeCpuRun] tab: Hook before start of execution - [AfterCpuStop] tab: Hook after break If the setting is saved as "project-file-name.tcl" in the directory where the project is stored, the setting is executed when the project is next opened. Figure A-3 Hook window
Object [BeforeDownload]Tab
Hook before downloading Before downloading is performed, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. Hook after resetting CPU after resetting CPU, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. Hook before starting execution before starting execution, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. Hook after breaking After breaking, the register values input to the tab are automatically overwritten by the specified value. All the commands described on the tabs are tested.
[AfterCpuReset]Tab
[BeforeCpuRun]Tab
[AfterCpuStop]Tab
button
294
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Function
APPENDIX A EXPANSION WINDOW
Object button
Function Saves all the tab contents to a file. If the ID78K0-QB was activated from a project file, the file is saved as "project-filename.tcl". Clears all the descriptions on the tabs.
button
Caution
Specify the general-purpose register and the SFR for the register name.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
295
APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS
APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS
- Usable Character Set - Symbols - Numeric Values - Expressions and Operators - File Names
B. 1
Usable Character Set Table B-1 List of Character Set Classification
Alphabetic characters Numerals Character equivalent to alphabetic character
Uppercase : A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Lowercase : a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0123456789 @_?
Character ( ) + * / %
Name Left parenthesis Right parenthesis Plus Minus Asterisk Slash Percent Tilde Vertical line Circumflex Ampersand Left bracket Right bracket Period Exclamation Changes operation order. Changes operation order.
Addition operator or positive sign Subtraction operator or negative sign Multiplication operator or indirect reference operator Division operator Remainder operator Complement operator Bit sum operator Bit difference operator Bit product operator or address operator Array subscript operator or indirect display symbol
|
^ & [ ] . !
Direct member operator or bit position specifier Absolute addressing start symbol
296
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table B-2
List of Special Characters Usage
Character
APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS
Character $ # , Dollar Sharp Comma Symbols
Name
Usage Relative addressing start symbol Symbol indicating an immediate value Delimiter between operands
B. 2
(a) A symbol consists of characters A to Z, a to z, @, _ (underbar), ?, and 0 to 9. (b) A symbol must start with a character other than numerals 0 to 9. (c) Uppercase characters (A to Z) and lowercase characters (a to z) are distinguished.
(d) A symbol must be no more than 2048 characters long (if a symbol of more than 2048 characters is defined, only the first 2048 characters are valid). (e) A symbol is defined by loading a load module file. (f) Symbols are classified into the following types by the valid range: - Global symbol (assembly language, structured assembly language, C language) - Static symbol (C language) In-file static symbol In-function static symbol - Local symbol (C language) In-file local symbol In-function local symbol In-block local symbol (g) The following symbols are available for each language used: Assembly language, structured assembly language, label name, constant name, bit symbol name C language Variable name (including pointer variable name, enumeration type variable name, array name, structure name, and union name) Function name, label name Array element, structure element, union element, bit field (if the symbol is an array, structure, or union) (h) A symbol can be described instead of an address or numeric value. (i) The valid range of a symbol is determined based on the source debug information when the source file is assembled or compiled. (j) Describe only the symbol name of a global symbol.
(k) A local symbol is expressed in pairs with a file name.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
297
APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS
B. 3
Numeric Values
The following four types of numeric values can be used. The input format of each type is as shown below. The suffix (bold) and the alphabetic characters of hexadecimal numbers may be uppercase or lowercase characters. If the first character is A to F, 0 must be prefixed to it. In the input field of ID78K0-QB, decimal numbers or hexadecimal numbers are alternately selected, depending on the default radix. Table B-3 Numeric Value Binary number Octal number nY n...nY (n=0,1) nO n...nO (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) nQ n...nQ (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7) n n...n nT n...nT (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9) n n...n nH n...nH 0xn 0xn...n (n=0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,A,B,C,D,E,F) Input Format of Numeric Values Input Format
Decimal number
Hexadecimal numbers
B. 4
Expressions and Operators
(1) Expressions An expression consists of constants, register names, SFR names, and symbols coupled by operators. If SFR name, label name, function name, or variable name is described as a symbol, an address is calculated as the value of the symbol. The elements making up an expression, except operators, are called terms (constants and labels). Terms are called the first term, the second term, and so on, starting from the left.
298
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS
(2) Operators The following operators of the C language can be used: Table B-4 Symbol Arithmetic operator + * / MOD % - sign + sign Logical operator NOT ~ AND & OR | XOR ^ Shift operator SHR >> SHL << Right shift Shifts the value of the first term by the value (number of bits) of the second term to the right, and returns the result. As many 0s as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the higher bits. Shifts the value of the first term by the value (number of bits) of the second term to the left, and returns the result. As many 0s as the number of shifted bits are inserted in the lower bits. Negation Logical product Logical sum Exclusive logical sum Logically negates each bit of the term, and returns the result. Obtains the logical product of the values of the first and second terms on each bit, and returns the result. Obtains the logical sum of the values of the first and second terms on each bit, and returns the result. Obtains the exclusive logical sum of the values of the first and second terms on each bit, and returns the result. Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Remainder Unary operator (negative) Unary operator (positive) Returns the sum of the first and second terms. Returns the difference between the first and second terms. Returns the product of the first and second terms. Divides the value of the first term by the value of the second term, and returns the integer of the result. Divides the value of the first term by the value of the second term, and returns the remainder of the result. Returns 2's complement of the value of the term. Returns the value of the term. Meaning List of Operators Explanation
Left shift
Byte separation operator HIGH LOW Higher byte Lower byte Of the lowest 16 bits of the term, returns the higher 8 bits. Of the lowest 16 bits of the term, returns the lower 8 bits.
Word separation operator HIGHW LOWW Other Higher word Lower word Of the 32 bits of the term, returns the higher 16 bits. Of the 32 bits of the term, returns the lower 16 bits.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
299
APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS
Symbol ( )
Meaning Left parenthesis Right parenthesis
Explanation Performs the operation in ( ) before the operation outside ( ). '(' and ')' are always used in pairs.
(3) Rules of operation Operations are performed according to the priority of the operators. Table B-5 Operator Priority Priority 1 2 3 4 5 6 Lower Higher (,) + sign, - sign, NOT, ~, HIGHT, LOW, HIGHW, LOWW *, /, MOD, %, SHR, >>, SHL, << +, AND, & OR, |, XOR, ^
- If the priorities of the operators are the same, the operation is performed from the left toward the right. - Performs the operation in ( ) before the operation outside ( ). - Each term in an operation is treated as unsigned 32-bit data. - All operation results are treated as unsigned 32-bit data. - If an overflow occurs during operation, the lower 32 bits are valid, and the overflow is not detected. (4) Terms To describe a constant for a term, the following numeric values can be described. Table B-6 Range of Radixes Radix Binary number Octal number Decimal number Hexadecimal numbers
0Y <= value <= 1111111111111111111111111111111Y (32 digits) 0O <= value <= 37777777777O -2147483648 <= value <= 4294967295 (A negative decimal number is internally converted into a 2's complement.) 0H <= value <= 0FFFFFFFH
300
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Operators
Range
APPENDIX B INPUT CONVENTIONS
B. 5
File Names
The following regulations apply to source file names and executable module file names. (a) A file name consists of characters A to Z, a to z, _ (underbar), and 0 to 9. (b) Uppercase characters (A to Z) and lowercase characters (a to z) are distinguished.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
301
APPENDIX C KEY FUNCTION LIST
APPENDIX C KEY FUNCTION LIST
Key BackSpace
Deletes one character before the cursor and moves the cursor to the position of the deleted character. At this time, the character string following the cursor moves forward. - Deletes one character after the cursor and move the character string following the cursor forward. - Deletes a various event condition selected in the Event Manager or each event dialog box. - Deletes the data selected in the Watch window. Alternately selects the insert mode and overwrite mode in the Source window and Assemble window. However, this key is invalid in the Memory, Register, and IOR windows, and only the overwrite mode can be used as an input mode. Loads the entire display screen to the clipboard as a bitmap image (function of Windows). - Closes the pull-down menu. - Closes the modal dialog box. - Restores the input data. Moves the cursor to the menu bar. Moves the cursor to the end of the line. Moves the cursor to the beginning of the line. Scrolls the screen one screen up. The cursor also moves up to the top of the screen. Scrolls the screen one screen down. The cursor also moves up to the top of the screen. Inserts one blank character. Moves the cursor to the next item. Moves the cursor up. If the cursor is at the bottom of the screen, scrolls the screen up one line at a time. Moves the cursor down. If the cursor is at the top of the screen, scrolls the screen down one line at a time. Moves the cursor to the left. If the cursor is at the left most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the right. Moves the cursor to the right. If the cursor is at the right most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the left. - Sets the input data. - Presses the default push button. Opens the Help window. Forcibly stops program execution. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Stop].
Delete
Insert
PrintScreen Esc
Alt End Home PageUp PageDown Space Tab Up arrow key Down arrow key Right arrow key
Left arrow key
Enter F1 F2
302
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Table C-1
Key Function List Function
APPENDIX C KEY FUNCTION LIST
Key F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 Shift+End Shift+Home Shift+Left arrow key Shift+Right arrow key Shift+F6 Shift+F9 Ctrl+End Ctrl+Home Ctrl+Left arrow key
Function Resets the CPU. Same function as [Run] menu -> [CPU Reset]. Resets the CPU and executes the program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Restart]. Executes the program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Go]. Executes the program to the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Come Here]. The user program is real-time executed until execution returns. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Return Out]. Step execution. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Step In]. Sets a breakpoint at cursor position in Source or Assemble window. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Break Point]. Next step execution. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Next Over]. Sets or deletes a software breakpoint. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Software Break Point]. Expands the selection range to the end of the line. Expands the selection range to the beginning of the line. Expands the selection range one character to the left. Expands the selection range one character to the right. Executes the program from the cursor position in the Source or Assemble window. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Start From Here]. Resets the CPU. Same function as [Run] menu -> [CPU Reset]. Displays the last line. The cursor will also move to the last line. Displays the first line. The cursor will also move to the first line. Moves the cursor one word to the left. If the cursor at the left most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the right. Moves the cursor one word to the right. If the cursor at the right most position on the screen, scrolls the screen one column to the left. Ignores break points being set, and executes the program. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Ignore break points and Go]. Sets the address at the cursor position in the Source window or Assemble window to the PC. Same function as [Run] menu -> [Change PC]. Selects all the events registered to the Event Manager. Same function as [View] menu -> [Select All Event] in the Event Manager. Copies a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Disassembles and displays the results from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window.Opens the Assemble window. Same function as [Jump] menu -> [Assemble].
Ctrl+Right arrow key
Ctrl+F5 Ctrl+F9
Ctrl+A Ctrl+C Ctrl+D
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
303
APPENDIX C KEY FUNCTION LIST
Key Ctrl+E
Function Opens the source file displayed in the active Source window with the editor specified by the PM plus when the PM plus is running. Same function as [Edit] menu -> [Edit Source]. Performs a search.Opens the search dialog box corresponding to the current window. Same function as [View] menu -> [Search...]. Moves the display position. Opens the each dialog box, depending on the current window. Same function as [View] menu -> [Move...]. Displays the memory contents from the jump destination address specified by the data value selected in the current window. Opens the Memory window. Same function as [Jump] menu -> [Memory...]. Loads a view file, source file, or text file. Opens the View File Load dialog box. The operation will differ depending on the extension of the file. view file: Displays the file in the corresponding window. Others: Displays the file in the Source window. Same function as [File] menu -> [Open...]. Saves the data displayed in the current window to the view file. Same function as [View] menu -> [Save...]. Displays the corresponding source text and source line, using the data value selected in the current window as the jump destination address. Opens the Source window. Same function as [Jump] menu -> [Source Text]. Pastes the contents of the clipboard buffer to the text cursor position. Temporarily displays the contents of the specified data. Opens the Quick Watch dialog box. Same function as [View] menu -> [Quick Watch...]. Cuts a selected character string and saves it to the clipboard buffer. Same function as [Edit] menu -> [Cut]. Expands the selection range one word to the left. Expands the selection range one word to the right.
Ctrl+G
Ctrl+J
Ctrl+M
Ctrl+O
Ctrl+S Ctrl+U
Ctrl+V Ctrl+W
Ctrl+X Ctrl+Shift+Left arrow key Ctrl+Shift+Right arrow key
304
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
- Display Format - Types of Messages - Message Lists
D. 1
Display Format
Messages are output to the error/warning dialog box. By pressing the F1 key while the error/warning dialog box is open, the related online help files are displayed. Figure D-1 Error/Warning Messages
D. 2
Types of Messages
The ID78K0-QB outputs the following types of messages. Table D-1 Types of Messages Type Axxxx
Fatal error messages Stops processing, and terminates the debugger. If this error occurs, debugging cannot be continued. Syntax error messages Stops processing, and opened windows and dialog boxes are closed. Warning messages or question messages Stops processing, but opened windows and dialog boxes are not closed.
Fxxxx Wxxxx
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
Meaning
305
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
D. 3
Message Lists < X0000~ > < X1000~ > < X2000~ > < X3000~ > < X4000~ > < X5000~ > < X6000~ > < X7000~ > < X8000~ > < X9000~ > < Xa000~ > < Xb000~ > < Xc000~ > < Xe000~ > < Xf000~ >
(1) X0000~ F0002: This feature is not supported. F0100 : Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the installation of the device driver for the PC interface board. 1) The driver may not be correctly installed. Reinstall the driver. A0101: Can not find initialization file (expc.ini). A0102: Host name not found. F0103: Data transfer to ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board. F0104: Data receive from ICE is timed out. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board. A0105: Failed in reading device file (d0xxx.78k). 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. A0106: Illegal data received. 1) Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board and restart the debugger. A0107: Can not communicate with ICE. A0108: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini). A0109: Can not communicate with ICE. Please terminate the debugger and check the power of ICE or the connection of cable then restart the debugger. F010a: Can not communicate. Please confirm the availability of the communication port. A01a0: No response from the evachip. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(IECUBE) No response from the CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET WAIT, HLDRQ and so on.(N-Wire CARD) No response from the emulation CPU. Please confirm the signal of the CLOCK or RESET,WAIT and so on.(78K0) 1) Check the HOLD signal, WAIT signal, clock signal, etc. The SFR value may not be correct. A01a1: Failed in reading ie703000.ie. A01a2: Break board is not connected. A01a3: Emulation board is not connected. A01a4: Board configuration of ICE is not consistent. A01a5: POD/EM1 board is not connected.
306
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
A01a6: Executor is running. A01a7: Failed in reading micro program file (m0xxx.78k). A01a8: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).(78K) Failed to find configuration file (lv8hw.ini). (V850) A01ad: Please update the device driver for the PC interface board. 1) The device driver may be old. Install the latest device driver. A01ae: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini).(78K) Failed in reading configuration file (lv8hw.ini). (V850) A01af: Failed in executing monitor command. A01b0: Can not communicate with monitor program. Please check the availability of communication port, the setting of CPU board or the type of cable. A01b1: Can not communicate with monitor program. Please terminate the debugger and check the power of CPU board or the connection of cable then restart the debugger. A01d0: Not enough memory in starting simulator. A01d1: Not enough memory in starting simulator. F0200: Verification error occurred. Failed in writing memory. 1) External memory could not be accessed, as it is not set. Change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the SFR window or Hook Procedure before download. F02a0: Bus hold error. 1) CPU is in the bus-hold status. Reset the debugger. F02a2: Can not compulsory break. F02a3: Reset under continuation. F02d2: Not enough memory for trace-buffer. F0300: User program is running. F0301: User program is being breaked. F0302: User program is being traced. F0303: Not traced. F0304: Trace memory is not set. F0306: No trace block exists. F0307: No event condition exists. F0308: No timer measurement is done. F0309: No trigger frame exists. F030a: Tracer is being stopped. F030b: Specified snap-event has not been registered. F030c: Specified stub-event has not been registered. F030d: Timer is running. F030e: Memory copy area is overlapped.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
307
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F030f: Trace has been already set. F0310: Event condition is not set. F0311: Too many valid timer event conditions. F0312: Specified timer event is not set. F0313: Illegal map range. 1) Check the map range in the Configuration dialog box. When mapping to external memory has been performed, change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the SFR window or Hook Procedure before download). F0314: Only trace delay mode can set with delay trigger. F0315: Delay trigger cannot set without trace delay mode. F03a0: Target is not turned on. 1) Check the target power supply. Check the cable connecting the in-circuit emulator and target board. Check that the VDD signal is input to the connector of the target board. F03a1: Step execution is being done. F03a2: Timer and Tracer are running. F03a3: Event link and BRS events are mixed. F03d0: Back-trace is being executed. F03d1: Back-trace is being stopped. F03d2: Back-trace execution point overrun oldest frame. F03d3: Register status or Memory status cannot be set up other than Phase1 of event link. F03d4: No back-trace information exists. F03d5: Last command can not be backstepped. F0400: Illegal condition. 1) Settings of the used in-circuit emulator and those of the Configuration dialog box may not match. Check the Chip selection. F0401: Result of timer measurement overflowed. F0402: Too many event conditions with path count. F0403: Too many address range conditions. F0404: Too many simultaneously-usable-event conditions. F0405: Too many snap-events. F0406: Too many stub-events. F0407: Too many initialization data. F0408: Too large search data (> 16 byte). F0409: Too large search data (> search range). F040a: Too many Linking-event conditions. F04a0: Software break conditions number overflow. F04a1: Not enough memory for emulation.
308
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F04a2: Too many partition of bus size. F04a3: Too many execution-event conditions. F04a4: Too many bus-event conditions. A0600: Not enough memory for buffer. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A0601: Not enough resource of operating system. F0b20: This event number can not be used. F0b61: Section Trace event conditions overflow. F0b80: Reset by hardware error. F0c00: Monitor file read error. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. A0c01: During access of register, CPU did time out. 1) Check the clock signal, etc. The register value may not be correct. A0c02: During access of memory, CPU did time out. 1) Check the HOLD signal, WAIT signal, clock signal, etc. The memory value may not be correct. A0c03: During access of SFR, CPU did time out. 1) Check the HOLD signal, WAIT signal, clock signal, etc. The IOR value may not be correct. F0c20: Guarded area can not be accessed. F0c21: Memory was unready status. F0c22: Memory unready status was canceled. F0c23: Bus hold under continuation. 1) Check the setting of the target board, or mask the HOLD pin. F0c24: It cannot shift to debug mode. 1) Check the clock signal. This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock. F0c25: Flash macro service ROM was accessed or stepped in. 1) Please perform [Go] execution or CPU reset. F0c26: FLMD terminal is in a write-protected state. 1) FLMD is not in the write-enabled status. Check the status of the FLMD0 and FLMD1 pins. F0c27: Security flag is in a write-protected state. 1) The security flag of the flash memory has disabled writing, block erasure, or chip erasure. Nothing can be written to the flash memory. F0c28: Internal RAM is not enough, the writing to flash memory is not made. 1) The internal RAM size is less than 4 KB and flash self-programming cannot be executed. F0c29: The blank check of flash memory failed. F0c2a: The erasing of flash memory failed.
F0c2b: The writing of flash memory failed. F0c2c: The internal verification of flash memory failed.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
309
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F0c2d: Failed in writing flash memory. F0c2e: There is no response from flash macro service. F0c2f : Response from flash macro service is not right. F0c30: Flash I/O register operation prohibition setup needs to be canceled. F0c31: STOP mode under continuation. Can not compulsory break. Please release STOP mode or reset the CPU. F0c32: Please write in flash memory in the single chip mode 0. F0c40: Status of effective event conditions cannot be changed. F0c41: Coverage test is being executed. F0c42: Monitor has failed in shift in the debugging mode.Please reset the CPU. F0c43: Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable. 1) The switch setting may be wrong if a desktop computer is used and two or more PC cards are inserted. Check the setting. connected). 2) Check the power to the in-circuit emulator and cable connections The switch setting may be wrong if a desktop computer is used and two or more PC cards are inserted. Check the setting. may have malfunctioned (when IECUBE connected). F0c44: Coverage test is being executed. F0c45: Inside of Power off reset emulation cannot carry out program execution. F0c60: Event before execution cannot be set up other than break conditions. F0c61: Can not register event numbers which can not be used for hardware break. F0c62: Event numbers reserved for hardware breaks can not be used. F0c63: Event link conditions cannot set. F0c64: Too many ROM-emulation-RAM areas. F0c67: Writing of flash memory during block is not made. Or it Or it may have malfunctioned (when N-Wire CARD, MINICUBE
F0c70: DCU cannot be accessed. 1) The device file selection may be incorrect. Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration dialog box. Check the power to the chip. Check the connection of the signal lines (DCK, DMS, DDI, DDO, and DRSTZ). Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker (when the IE-70000-MC-NW-A, N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c71: Reset cannot be performed. 1) Check the clock signal. This may be caused by a stopped clock or a slow clock.
310
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F0c72: Monitor memory cannot be accessed. 1) Revise the Main OSC value in the Configuration dialog box. Check the setting of main clock in the Configuration dialog box , the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the is N-Wire CARD, IECUBE connected). 2) Revise the Main OSC value in the Configuration dialog box. If this does not solve the problem, IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). 3) Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the IE-70000-MC-NW-A is connected). F0c73: Monitor execution cannot be performed. 1) Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the IE-70000-MC-NW-A , N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c74: CPU register cannot be accessed. 1) Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker. The problem may also be caused by an internal chip problem (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) The device file selection may be incorrect. Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration dialog box. If this does not solve the problem, the IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c75 : Monitor has failed in shift in the debugging mode. Please reset the CPU. F0c76 : Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual. 1) Initial state at the time of DCU access start is unusual (does not start and remains in the reset state). Check the connection of the signal lines (DCK, DMS, DDI, DDO, and DRSTZ). Check the noise
level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) The device file selection may be incorrect. Select a device file that supports the target chip in Chip Selection in the Configuration dialog box. If this does not solve the problem, the IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c77 : DCU access is unusuall. 1) DCU access is unusuall (verify error). Check the connection of the signal lines (DCK, DMS, DDI, DDO, and DRSTZ). Check the noise level by a DCK waveform test on the N-Wire Checker (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0c78: Failed in reading of trace data. F0ca0: Can not communicate with ICE. Please confirm the power of ICE, connection of the interface cable, or I/O address of the PC interface board.(V850) Error occurred inside debugger. (IECUBE) 1) Can not communicate with in-circuit emulator. Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board etc.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
311
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F0ca1: Monitor file not found. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. F0ca2: Device file which does not correspond to on tip debug. 1) An attempt was made to start with a device file not supporting on-chip debugging. The device file may be old. Install the latest device file (when the N-Wire CARD, MINICUBE is connected). 2) IE may be malfunctioning (when the IECUBE is connected). F0ca3: Information that it does not support is included in on tip debug information on device file. 1) An unknown flag is included in the on-chip debug information of the device file.The exec module may be old. Install the latest exec module. F0ca4 : Device file which does not correspond to IECUBE. 1) An attempt was made to start with a device file not supporting IECUBE. The device file may be old. Install the latest device file. F0caf: Trace block can not be stepped over.
(2) X1000~ A1000: Failed in initializing ICE. A1001: No entry exists for specified number. A1002: Can not relocate internal RAM. F1003: Illegal relocation address. F1004: Illegal condition. A1005: Invalid attribute. F1006: Illegal address. A1007: Not enough memory on ICE. A1008: Not enough memory for tables. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A1009: Already initialized. A100a: Not initialized. F100b: User program is running. F100c: Different bus size has been already specified. F100d: Too large bus size. F100e: Too large bus partition size. W100f: Target is not turned on. F1010: Illegal map range. F1011: Failed in setting internal ROM and RAM. F1012: This feature is not supported. F1013: No terminal name. W1014: Data is not exist.
312
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
A1015: Programmable-IOR does not exist. F1016: Programmable-IOR does not movable. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the latest device file. F1017: I/O Protect mapping is possible a target attribute only. F1018: Illegal Internal ROM size. F101a: Specified Simulator configuration file was not found. F101b: Simulator configuration file was not specified. F101c: Illegal Simulator configuration file. A10ff: Can not communicate with ICE.
A1dbe: Error occurred inside debugger. (3) X2000~ F2000: Illegal SFR name. A2001: Illegal address. F2002: User program is running. F2003: Illegal SFR number. F2004: Illegal bit number. W2005: SFR of Read Protect attribute was specified. F2006: Hidden SFR was specified. F2007: SFR of ban read or write was specified. F2008: SFR not existing was specified. A2009: Device file is damaged or error is in file. F200a: Illegal value specified for SFR. A200b: Can not copy. A200c: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. W200d: No initialize data for SFR. F200e: SFR area can not be accessed. A20ff: Can not communicate with ICE.
A2222: Illegal condition.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
313
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
(4) X3000~ F3000: No mapped address was accessed. 1) The allocation addresses of the program and the addresses of the debugger may not match. Set the mapping to the external memory in the Configuration dialog box according to the allocation addresses specified in the link directive file on compilation. When mapping to external memory has been executed, change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the SFR window or Hook Procedure before download. F3001: Memory has different value. F3002: Illegal start address. F3003: Illegal end address F3004: Illegal start address and end address. F3005: Illegal condition. F3006: User program is running. F3007: Verification error. F3008: No condition specified. F3009: Parameter size does not align with access size alignment. F300a: Specified address does not align with access size alignment. F300b: Source address does not align with access size alignment. F300c: Destination address does not align with access size alignment. F300d: Illegal end address. F300e: Different access size in specified area. F300f: Different access size both in source and destination areas. F3010: Different access size in destination area. F3011: Different access size, source & destination. A3012: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. F3013: Failed in writing DMM. F3014: Oveflowed mapping area. F3015: Processing was interrupted. F3016: This feature is not supported. A30ff: Can not communicate with ICE.
(5) X4000~ F4000: Can not delete specified event. 1) The specified event cannot be deleted as it is being used under another condition. Invalidate it for other usages before deleting.
314
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F4001: Illegal table number. F4002: Illegal start address. F4003: Illegal end address. F4004: Illegal status. F4005: Illegal data. F4006: Specified event number has been already used. F4007: Too many same events are registered. F4008: Specified event has not been registered. F4009: Illegal data size. F400a: Illegal mode. F400b: Setting value is inaccurate. F400c: Event link conditions cannot be used for section trace conditions. F400d: Too many identical events are registered (>= 32767). F400e: Specified event condition does not exist. F400f: Illegal event link condition. F4010: Function not found. A4011: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. F4012: Timer is being disabled. W4013: Access size is different from its mapped bus size. F4014: Can not use software break. F4015: Can not use event condition specifying address range. F4016: Can not change event condition. F4017: Can not access word at odd address. A4018: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. F4019: This feature is not supported. F401a: No Event. F401b: Can not use tag-event. W401c: Software break can not be set on this area. F401d: Start event and end event of timer are not made to the same setup. F401e: Too many trace-events. F401f: Path count cannot be set up. F4020: Address range cannot be set up in event before execution. F4021: Event conditions number overflow. F4022: Software DMM conditions number overflow.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
315
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F4023: Real-time call conditions number overflow. F4024: Software break call conditions number overflow. F4025: Illegal snap condition. F4026: Too many event conditions cannot be set as Phase1 and Phase2 of event link conditions. F4027: Software break conditions number which can be set as internal ROM was overflow. F4318: Illegal memory bank setting. (6) X5000~ A5000: Illegal device file type. A5001: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A5002: Can not open device file. A5003: Reading of device file went wrong. A5004: Can not close device file. A5005: Illegal device file format. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. A5006: Failed in initializing ICE. A5007: Device file has broken or error is in a file. F5008: Can not open device file. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. F5009: Can not open EX78K4.OM0. F500a: Specified device file is illegal version. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the device file. W500b: Specified device file does not relocate IRAM. A500c: Failed in reading expc.ini. A500d: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. W500e: No tag data which it was going to refer to device file. A5300: Illegal device file type. A5301: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A5302: Can not open database file. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger and device file. A5303: Reading of database file went wrong. A5304: Can not close database file.
316
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
A5305: Illegal database file format. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger, and device file. A5306: Database information has been already initialized. A5307: Database information does not exist. F5308: Can not open specified database file. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. F5309: Specified database file is illegal version. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger, and the device file. (7) X6000~ F6000: Current function does not exist. F6001: Illegal symbol name. F6002: Illegal condition. F6003: Illegal function name. F6004: Overflowed output buffer size. F6005: Illegal expression. (8) X7000~ F7000: Illegal mode. F7001: User program is running. F7002: User program has been stopped. F7003: Trace enabled. F7004: Trace memory is not set. F7005: Function return address does not exist, can not do step execution. W7010: No source information exists. W7011: Unknown result of step execution. A7012: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. A70fe: Bus hold error. 1) CPU is in the bus-hold status. Reset the debugger. A70ff: Can not communicate with ICE.
F7801: End waiting state of step execution was canceled. F7802: End waiting state of step execution was canceled. F7f00: Aborted step execution. F7f02: Suspended step execution. A7f03: Failed in canceling RUN/STEP.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
317
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
F7f04: Can not execute non-mapped area. F7f05: This feature is not supported. (9) X8000~ F8000: Specified file was not found. F8001: Illegal line number. F8002: Current information is not set. F8003: Illegal address. F8004: This feature is not supported. (10) X9000~ A9000: Specified register symbol does not exist. A9001: Specified register symbol ID does not exist. F9002: Illegal value. A9003: Illegal condition. A9004: Too large register size. F9005: This feature is not supported. (11) Xa000~ Fa001: Illegal expression. Fa002: Start address is bigger than the end address. Fa003: Illegal source path. Fa004: Too long expression. Aa005: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Fa006: Illegal argument. Fa007: Illegal program number. Fa008: Source path is not set. Fa009: File not found. Fa00a: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Aa00b: Can not close file. Aa00c: Failed in reading file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fa00d: Not source file of load module. Fa00e: Illegal line number.
318
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Fa00f: Variable does not exist. Aa010: Can not communicate with ICE. Fa011: Can not access register. Fa012: Can not access memory. Aa013: Reading of file went wrong. Fa014: It was going to open the binary file. Fa015: Can not get temporary path. 1) The disk is full. Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk. Fa016: Can not create temporary file. 1) The disk is full. Delete or move unnecessary files and increase the available memory in the disk. Fa017: Can not remove temporary file. Fa020: This feature is not supported. Fa021: Symbol assigned to register cannot be specified. (12) Xb000~ Fb000: Illegal command line. Fb001: Program information does not exist in specified load module file. Fb002: File not found. Fb003: Function not found. Fb004: Selected load module different from kind (Chip) was loaded. Fb005: Symbol not found. 1) The address could not be found. Specify a location holding address information. Fb008: Illegal expression. Ab009: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Fb00a: Illegal symbol in load module file. Fb00b: Current program does not exist. Fb00c: Current file does not exist. Ab00d: Current function does not exist. Ab00e: Current line does not exist. Ab00f: Tag not found. Ab010: Failed in loading symbol table. Ab011: Illegal line number. Fb012: Too large line number. Ab015: Reading of file went wrong. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
319
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Ab016: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ab017: Failed in writing file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ab019: Reading of file went wrong. Ab01a: Can not close file. Fb01b: Too long load module file name. Ab01c: Too many entries of the task kind. Fb01d: Address not found. Wb01e: No debug information (not compiled in Debug Build mode). Fb01f: Can not find structure member. Fb020: Can not find value. Fb021: No debug information exists in load module file. 1) To create a load module with appended debug information, execute build in build mode of Debug Build. Fb022: Illegal line number. Ab023: Current stack frame is not active. Ab024: Different section. Fb026: Too many array dimensions (> 4). Fb027: Found end of file. 1) The specified file may be damaged. Recreate the file. Fb028: This feature is not supported. Fb029: Illegal address. Ab02a: Can not communicate with ICE. Fb02b: Can not stack trace with current PC value. Fb02c: Too many blocks for one function. Fb02d: Illegal argument. Fb02e: The file does not exist in the SOURCE PATH. 1) On stopping the program, the source that the debugger tried to display could not be found. Check if the path connects to the source in the Debugger Option dialog box, or check if the source is in the same directory as the out file. Refer to the Assemble window on which the error message is displayed, and check if the corresponding path connects. Fb02f: Information has been deleted because of optimization. Ab030: Monitor timed out. 1) Check the power of the in-circuit emulator, cable connections, and setting of the interface board and restart the debugger. Ab031: Already set in memory.
320
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Ab032: Out of scope. Ab033: LP is not stored. Fb034: Return execution from present PC position cannot be performed. Fb037: Too Many Line-Numbers Information. Fb038: Compiler version mismatch. 1) Recreate the load module with the latest compiler. Ab039: Failed in loading debug information. Ab03a: No more section information. Fb040: Specified file is not load module. 1) This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker. Ab041: Too many files in load module to download. Wb042: Symbol module is not initialized. Fb32e: Illegal port number. Fb32f: Illegal port name. Fb330: Illegal port position. Fb331: Illegal increment number. Fb332: Port for memory bank is not set. Fb333: Illegal bank number. Fb334: Area for memory bank is not set. Wb335: Too long symbol name. (13) Xc000~ Fc001: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ac002: Can not close file. Ac003: Reading of file went wrong. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ac004: Reading of file went wrong. Fc005: Illegal file type. Fc006: Kind (Chip) of load module is illegal. Fc007: Specified file is not load module. 1) This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker. Fc008: Specified load module file (COFF) is old version. Ac009: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
321
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Fc00a: No mapped address was accessed. Fc00b: Load module is not loaded. Fc00c: Illegal argument. Fc00d: User program is running. Fc00e: User program is being traced. Fc00f: Interrupted.
Ac010: Can not communicate with ICE. Fc011: Illegal load module file format. Fc012: Check sum error. Fc013: Too wide address range to upload (> 1M byte). Fc014: Failed in writing file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fc015: Illegal program number. Fc016: Load information is full. Wc017: Symbol information is duplicated, please reset symbols. Fc018:Specified file is not load module. 1) This is not a linker output file. Source debug cannot be executed with the load module before output from the linker. Specify the load module output from the linker. Fc019: Failed in writing memory. Wc01a: BSS area is assigned to non-mapped area. 1) When the program is executed, a non-map break may occur. Either allocate the BSS area to the internal RAM by using a CA link directive, or map the emulation memory or target memory to the BSS area using the Configuration dialog box of the debugger. Fc01b: Programmable-IOR address not specified. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. Wc01c: Programmable IOR address mismatch. 1) Necessary files may be damaged. Reinstall the debugger. Wc01d: Selected load module different from kind (Chip) was loaded. Fc101e: .Flash erase is not supported on IECUBE. Fc100: This feature is not supported. (14) Xd000~ Ad000: Error occurred inside debugger. Ad001: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Ad002: Failed in reading initialization file (expc.ini). Ad003: ICE is not connected.
322
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Fd004: Can not find Dynamic Link Library. (15) Xe000~ Fe000: Illegal argument. Fe001: Illegal start address. Fe002: Illegal end address. Fe003: Too large size. Fe004: Can not open file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fe005: Failed in reading file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Fe006: Reading of file went wrong. Fe007: Failed in writing file. 1) The file is damaged or does not exist. Recreate the file. Ae008: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Fe009: Illegal file format. Fe00a: Verification error. Fe010: This feature is not supported. (16) Xf000~ Af000: Not enough memory. 1) There is not enough system memory. Close the applications being executed and the open files. Ff000: Not enough memory. Ff001: [XXX] not found. Wf002: Not found [XXX]. Search from the beginning? Wf003: Already exceed search region. Ff004: Missing parameter. Ff005: Illegal function name. Ff006: Illegal number. Ff007: Start address is bigger than end address. Ff008: Illegal symbol or expression. Ff009: [XXX] This file is illegal type. Ff100: Disk cannot write or full. Ff101: File not found. Ff102: File not Create.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
323
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Ff103: Old project file version. Ff104: Illegal project file format. Ff105: This file is a project file for [XXX].Please select a correct file. Wf106: CPU in the Project File was Changed. You must exit the debugger for the new CPU. Do you exit the Debugger? Wf107: CPU in the Project File was Changed. Do you start the Debugger with this CPU? Wf108: Selected project file different [YYY] from chip [XXX] was opened. Does it open, although the chip cannot be changed? Wf109: Project Manager cannot be used with the debugger of this version. Please use PMplus. Wf200: No difference encountered. Ff201: Memory mapping error. Ff202: Verify error. 1) External memory could not be accessed, as it is not set. Change the register values necessary for accessing the external memory using the SFR window or Hook Procedure before download . Wf203: When a program is running, while rewriting a memory, program execution stops for a moment. Do you wish to rewrite a memory? Wf300: Would you like to save the changes made in [XXX]? Ff301: The symbol being used on the event condition can't be evaluated. Wf302: Delete: [XXX] Wf303: [XXX] is edited. Delete: [YYY]? Wf304: [XXX] is edited. Save: [YYY]? Wf305: [XXX] is already exist. Do you replace it? Ff306: This name is too long. Ff307: There is the same name in other kinds. Ff308: An address can't be omitted. Ff309: Illegal address mask. Ff30a: Illegal data mask. Ff30b: Illegal ext probe mask. Ff30c: Illegal ext probe data.
Ff30d: Illegal pass count. Ff30e: Illegal register name. Ff30f: Illegal register bank.
Ff310: Illegal delay count. Wf311: Only one [XXX] can be enabled. Do you make this [YYY] to enable? Ff312: [XXX] is already there. Ff313: Event number already exist. Ff314: Event name is not set.
324
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Ff315: [XXX] is already there. Ff316: Max number of enabled [XXX] event is over. Please disable other enabled [YYY] event. Ff317: Max number of set event is over. Ff31e: Illegal start address. Ff31f: Illegal end address.
Ff322: Illegal count rate. Ff323: Illegal time out break count. Ff324: Section and Qualify can be specified at the same time. Wf325: User program is running. Do you want to stop user program for a moment and set it? Wf326: User program is running. Do you want to stop user program for a moment and delete it? Ff350: There is a phase which event are not in the middle. Ff351: The same event is contained in Link and Disable. Ff352: An event isn't specified. Ff357: AND event is in Phase. Ff400: Coverage mapping error. Wf401: Clear coverage? Ff500: Illegal symbol. Ff501: Illegal value. Ff502: Illegal parameter. Ff503: Max number of symbol is over. Ff504: This variable cannot be set as a break. 1) Break cannot be set for the following variables. - Local variables, static variables - Array variables, member variables of structures/unions - Register/SFR - Variable expressions Wf600: Save project file? Wf601: When connecting the target system, please turn on the target system. 1) When a target is not connected, simply click the button. Wf602: Please change a MODE mask condition or connect the target system.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
325
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Ff603: Incorrect ID Code. 1) This may be caused by the following (when the N-Wire CARD is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 7 of address 0x79) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once. 2) This may be caused by the following (when the MINICUBE is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 0,1 of address 0x84) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once by flash writer. Af604 : Incorrect ID Code. Abort the debugger. 1) This may be caused by the following (when the N-Wire CARD is connected) - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 7 of address 0x79) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once. 2) This may be caused by the following (when the MINICUBE is connected). - The ID code is incorrect. -> Input the correct ID code. - The internal flash memory is in the write mode because the FLMD0 pin is high. -> Make the FLMD0 pin low. - The emulator connection prohibition mode is set because the ID code (bit 0,1 of address 0x84) is 0. ->Erase the internal flash memory once by flash writer. Ff605: Please check connection with the target board. 1) Check the connection of the target connector (TC). If a target is not connected, review the Target setting in the Configuration dialog box. Ff606: Please check connection with the target board, and power on it. 1) Check the target power supply. Configuration dialog box. If a target is not connected, review the Target setting in the
326
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Wf607 : Please check connection of the exchange adapter. 1) Check the connection of the exchange adapter (EA). Recommend wearing of the exchange adapter, if the target is not connected. Ff608 : Please disconnect the target board. 1) A current may flow from the internal power supply to the target. Disconnect the target connector (TC) from the conversion adapter (EA). Review the setting in the Configuration dialog box if the target is not connected. Ff609: Please power off the target board, and disconnect it. Wf700: Do you want to download Load Module File? Wf701: Do you load symbol information only? Wf800: Configuration of Memory Bank is not set. Wf801: BANK address must be in target memory. Ff802: All events are deleted. because the use of external probe was changed. Ff803: This event address is invalid on current configuration. Ff804: Invalid PC value. Ff805: Cannot set temporary break on this address. Ff806: External data is being used by Debugger. Ff900: Illegal I/O port name. Ff901: Memory mapping error. 1) The specification of the address is illegal. Check the addresses that can be specified in the Add I/O Port dialog box. Ff902: Illegal access size. Ff903: Illegal access type. Ff904: There is the same name. Wf905: [XXX] is already exist. Do you replace it? Wf906: Would you like to register the change made in [XXX]? Ffa00: The [XXX] function of current program on PC position not found. 1) The symbol specified in main() label: in the Debugger Option dialog box could be found. Set a symbol of the main routine of the program. Default is _main. Ffa01: The line information on PC position not found. 1) The source file corresponding to program counter (PC) value when the program was stopped could not be found. The following reasons are possible. -The source file exists in a location that the source path does not connect to. -The program stopped where the source files, such as library or RX, do not exist. -The program looped, jumped to an address that is not used by the program, and stopped there.
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
327
APPENDIX D MESSAGES
Wfb00: User program is running. Do you want to stop user program? 1) button is selected, execution of the user program is stopped and then the Exit Debugger dialog box is displayed. If it is specified in the Debugger Option dialog box that the Exit Debugger dialog box is not to be displayed, however, the ID78K0-QB is terminated. button is selected, execution of the user program is not stopped and the Exit Debugger dialog box is not displayed. The ID78K0-QB is not terminated. Ffc00: Online help window cannot be started. Please install HTML Help environment with reference to a users manual. Ffe00: The maximum size of RRM was exceeded. Wfe01: There is a duplicate RRM address. Wfe0b: It shift to the flash mode. Is it completely cleared but is the present event. Doesn't it care? Fffff: Interrupted.
328
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX E INDEX
APPENDIX E INDEX
A About dialog box ... 243 Access monitor ... 164 Access monitor function ... 53 Active status and static status ... 72 Add I/O Port dialog box ... 188 Add Watch dialog box ... 151 Address move dialog box ... 140 ASCII display ... 165 Assemble Search dialog box ... 138 Assemble window ... 134
where ... 286 wish ... 287 xtime ... 288 xtrace ... 289 Command reference ... 250 Conditional trace ... 60 Configuration dialog box ... 94 Console window ... 245 Contents saved to project file ... 69 Context menu ... 81
B break break types ... 41 Breakpoint setting ... 42 setting break to variable ... 43 Break dialog box ... 230 Browse dialog box ... 248
C callback procedure ... 254 cautions ... 78 Change Watch dialog box ... 154 character set ... 296 clock ... 98 Come Here ... 47 command ... 245 address ... 257 assemble ... 258 batch ... 259 breakpoint ... 260 command list ... 251 dbgexit ... 262 download ... 263 extwin ... 264 finish ... 265 go ... 266 help ... 267 hook ... 268 ie ... 269 inspect ... 270 jump ... 271 map ... 272 mdi ... 273 memory ... 274 module ... 275 next ... 276 refresh ... 277 register ... 278 reset ... 279 run ... 280 step ... 281 stop ... 282 upload ... 283 version ... 284 watch ... 285
D Debug function list ... 35 Debugger Option dialog box ... 109 Delay Count dialog box ... 214 Delay trigger ... 213 Delay trigger trace ... 61 Displaying event details ... 217 Download ... 37 Download dialog box ... 120 Download Function / Upload Function ... 37 drag & drop function ... 76
E Environment Setting File Load Dialog Box ... 239 Environment Setting File Save Dialog Box ... 237 Error messages at start up ... 29 Errors ... 305 Event dialog box ... 224 Event function ... 62 Event manager area ... 64 Number of enabled events ... 65 Setting event ... 63 Various event conditions ... 62 Event icon ... 66 Event Manager ... 216 Event manages ... 65 Event Setting Status (Event Mark) ... 126 Exit Debugger dialog box ... 242 Expressions ... 298 Extended Option dialog box ... 102
F fail-safe break ... 99 Fail-safe Break dialog box ... 105 flash memory ... 53
G -g option ... 22
H hook procedure ... 255
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
329
APPENDIX E INDEX
I I/O protect ... 36 ID code ... 22, 98 IECUBE ... 20 In-circuit emulator ... 21 input conventions ... 296 Installing ... 23 Internal Extend RAM ... 36 Internal high-speed RAM ... 36 Internal ROM ... 36 IOR Select dialog box ... 185 IOR window ... 181
R Range of Radixes ... 300 Register Window ... 178 reset ... 241 Reset Debugger dialog box ... 241 right click menu ... 81 RRM function ... 67 Run-Break event ... 57
J jump function ... 73
L linking window ... 75 Load/Save Function ... 68 Local Variable window ... 156
M Main window ... 82 mapping ... 100 Mapping settings ... 36 Mask ... 100 Memory Compare dialog box ... 174 Memory Compare Result dialog box ... 176 Memory Copy dialog box ... 172 Memory Fill dialog box ... 170 Memory manipulation function ... 52 Memory Search dialog box ... 167 Memory window ... 163 Menu bar ... 82 Messages ... 305 MINICUBE ... 20 Mixed display mode Source window ... 39 Trace window ... 60
S Section trace ... 61 Security ID ... 22 Setting debugging environment ... 36 setting file ... 71 Software Break Manager ... 221 Source Search dialog box ... 130 Source Text move dialog box ... 132 Source window ... 125 Stack area ... 36 Stack trace display function ... 51 Stack Trace window ... 159 Start From Here ... 47 Startup option ... 25 Startup Routine ... 113 Status Bar ... 91 Symbol To Address dialog box ... 141
O Operating Environment ... 21 Operators ... 299
T Target ... 36 Time out break ... 194 Timer dialog box ... 191 Timer function ... 56 Timer Result dialog box ... 195 Toolbar ... 89 Trace Data Select dialog box ... 206 Trace dialog box ... 211 Trace function ... 58 trace memory ... 58 Trace mode ... 60 Trace move dialog box ... 209 Trace Search dialog box ... 201 Trace window ... 196 Tracer control mode ... 61 Types of Messages ... 305
P pick up ... 207 PM plus ... 31 Point mark area ... 126, 135 program code ... 128 Program execution function ... 46 project file ... 68, 242 Project File Save dialog box ... 116
U Unconditional trace ... 60 Uninstalling ... 23 Upload ... 37 Upload dialog box ... 123
Q Qualify trace ... 61, 212 Quick Watch dialog box ... 148
V Verify check ... 104 view file ... 70 View File Load dialog box ... 235 View File Save dialog box ... 232
330
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
APPENDIX E INDEX
W Watch function ... 48 Watch window ... 143 window list ... 79 window reference ... 79
User's Manual U16996EJ2V0UM
331


▲Up To Search▲   

 
Price & Availability of ID78K0-QB

All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022  

[Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy]
Mirror Sites :  [www.datasheet.hk]   [www.maxim4u.com]  [www.ic-on-line.cn] [www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net] [www.alldatasheet.com.cn] [www.gdcy.com]  [www.gdcy.net]


 . . . . .
  We use cookies to deliver the best possible web experience and assist with our advertising efforts. By continuing to use this site, you consent to the use of cookies. For more information on cookies, please take a look at our Privacy Policy. X